Home

DL850/DL850V ScopeCorder Communication Interface User`s Manual

1. Command Function Page TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for 5 128 OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 128 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 128 CONDition channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR CHANnel x Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 128 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for OR triggers TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Sets or queries the type of external trigger that is used with OR triggers 5 128 TRIGger OUT Queries all trigger output settings 5 128 TRIGger OUT TIME Sets or queries the H pulse interval that is used when the trigger output 5 128 terminal output type is 1 TRIGger OUT TYPE Sets or queries the trigger output terminal output type 5 128 TRIGger POSition Sets or queries the trigger position 5 128 TRIGger SIMPle Queries all simple trigger settings 5 129 TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal Sets or queries the external trigger slope 5 129 SLOPe TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis Sets or queries the hysteresis for simple triggers 5
2. Side Panel UTILITY key page 3 5 Press this key to set the communication interface for remote control and the GP IB address Sanae 100 120 220 240 V AC Sanae VA MAX 50 60 Hz TEASE T ig GP IB port This port is for connecting the DL850 DL850V to a controller such as a PC using a GP IB cable For details on how to connect the DL850 DL850V to a controller see page 3 2 IM DL850 17EN 3 1 jieuondo e ejie31u gr d9 B 3 2 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional GP IB Cable The DL850 DL850V is equipped with an IEEE St d 488 1978 24 pin GP IB connector Use GP IB cables that comply with IEEE St d 488 1978 Connection Procedure Connect a GP IB cable as shown below Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes Securely fasten the GP IB cable connector screws On the PC end use a GP IB board or card made by National Instruments For more details see section 3 4 The DL850 DL850V may not operate properly if the DL850 DL850V is connected to the PC through converters such as a GP IB to USB converter For more details contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Several cables can be used to connect multiple devices However no more than 15 devices including the controller can be connected on a si
3. Command Function Page SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is turned off 5 119 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Sets or queries the LCD brightness 5 119 SYSTem LCD MODE Sets or queries whether the backlight is on 5 119 SYSTem LOGic Queries all logic display settings 5 119 SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Numerical Sets or queries the numeric display format of logic module data 5 119 Format SYSTem LOGic CORDer Cursor Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you use cursors to display 5 119 Order logic module data as bits SYSTem LOGic BORDer Bit Order Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you display logic module data 5 119 as waveforms SYSTem MLANguage Sets or queries the menu language 5 120 SYSTem OVERview Displays the system information 5 120 SYSTem PACTion Sets or queries whether the action on trigger mode will be enabled when the 5 120 DL850 DL850V turns on ON or not OFF SYSTem PSTart Sets or queries whether waveform acquisition will be started when the 5 120 DL850 DL850V turns on ON or not OFF SYSTem RCMode Remote Control Sets or queries whether remote signals to stop measurements will be 5 120 Mode ignored ON or not OFF SYSTem SCALefont Sets or queries the font size that is used for waveform labels and scale 5 120 values SYSTem SOITem Scale On ITEM Sets or queries which scales are displayed
4. sadeteandeeatavjeceeestens 5 137 ASleci 5 139 Common Command GFOUD 2 iicet ede ioter lean dorian liad 5 141 Status Reports 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 About Status Reports tei eee e eei eb li Freie Leib iren 6 1 rura n 6 3 standard Event Reglster iini ie Eie ni eoo US Ree iin 6 4 Extended Event Iegister ecco sere iiic iore des cuxacc cba pea eee Eoo cae Se aai 6 5 Output and Error QUEUES pstry tnn nes ea d ie that EnaA STENARNA 6 6 vi IM DL850 17EN Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface 1 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850 DL850V keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 1 2 has been activated by a controller YOKOGAWA DL850 COPE CORE Side Panel te 100 120 220 240 V AC 200 te MAX 50 60 Hz UTILITY key page 1 5 Press this key to set the communication interface and timeout value for remote control and to set the user name and password for user authentication
5. Command Function Page XY WINDow lt x gt Queries all settings related to the specified XY window 5 137 XY WINDow x TRANge Sets or queries the T Y waveform range to display in the XY window 5 137 XY WINDow lt x gt MODE Sets or queries whether the specified XY window is displayed 5 137 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt Queries all settings related to the specified XY waveform 5 137 XY WAVeform x1 DISPlay Sets or queries whether the specified XY waveform is displayed 5 137 XY WAVeform xl XTRace Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s 5 138 X axis XY WAVeform xl YTRace Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s 5 138 Y axis ZOOM Group ZOOM Queries all zoom settings 5 139 ZOOM ASCRo11 Queries all auto scroll settings 5 139 ZOOM ASCRo11 JUMP Moves the center position of the zoom box to the left or right edge of the 5 139 main window ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed Sets or queries the auto scroll speed of the zoom box 5 139 ZOOM ASCRo11 STARt Starts auto scrolling 5 139 ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Stops auto scrolling 5 139 ZOOM ASCRo1ll TARGet Sets or queries the zoom window that will be auto scrolled 5 139 ZOOM FORMat lt x gt Sets or queries the display format of the specified zoom waveform 5 139 ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt Queries all settings related to the specified group display of zoom 5 139 waveforms ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt
6. Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 VALUE gt MI POSITION gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 VALUE 100 M1 POSITION 3 00 5 58 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor FFT MARKer M x TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M x TRACe OFF FFT1 FFT2 CURSor FFT MARKer M x TRACe x 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE FFT1 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 TRACE FFT1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Function Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe Function Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe lt x gt 1 Example CURSOR F ER M1 F STATE ON CURSOR F ER M1 F STATE gt CURSOR FE ER M1 F STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M x F VALue Function Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 F VALUE 100 00000E 03 CURSor FFT M
7. slope frequency ccenetacdeeide a aee Pda oe tea tete ne EROS 5 38 smoothing frequency 5 41 snapshot 5 111 gu T 5 117 SPD Serial Poll Disable 1 nantes 3 7 SPE Serial Poll Enable is standard event register 6 4 SIARTISIOB KGy cite tetris ee cep rb erre te ei cepe veo 5 118 Status DVE wees eho Y Status fepofts tee retenti teras stop prediction frequency s SUING Ko FE ir RO S E S tzepieaee A E L TTA T REID TAIN Capture rr T DIV time base TOPP thermocouple temperature esseusssss 5 47 threshold level frequency 5 38 threshold level MATH csceceesseeeceeneeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeanees 5 93 UNG EA 5 117 IMIDELI 5 25 time base TIME DIV cent renes 5 121 timeout cursor 5 69 timeout GO NO GO timeout measure timeout single start time search time Of time synchronization T time unit fr qUency acie oett be Hte ecu 5 42 UME WINGOW e ERE ID 5 94 WIIG Te E EEA ET E ON DH SEE BOD LAN Fe rur Rede eue ii trace clear On Stabl iioc ciere coe rec inen epe oed 5 137 transition filter rrr rre 6 5 trigger nds M 5 122 action on trigger 5 122 A Delay B B Between B TimeOut EdgeOnA zs enhanced eec achats cd ed ad ERR eaad
8. Ethernet port This port is for connecting the DL850 DL850V to a controller such as a PC using an Ethernet cable For details on how to connect the DL850 DL850V to a controller see page 1 4 IM DL850 17EN 1 1 92ej19jU 39uJ9u13 1 2 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications Ethernet Interface Features Reception Features Allows you to specify the same settings that you can using the front panel keys Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes Transmission Features The DL850 DL850V can transmit measured and computed data The DL850 DL850V can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850 DL850V can transmit error codes when errors occur Ethernet Interface Specifications Number of ports 1 Electrical and mechanical specifications IEEE802 3 Data rate 100 Mbps max Communication protocol TCP IP Connector RJ 45 Port number 10001 tcp Data Transfer Rate Switching The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850 DL850V to transmit waveform data Model DL850 DL850V Controller PC Pentium4 3 2 GHz OS Windows XP Network adapter Intel PRO 1000 GT Desktop Adapter Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 1 ms Approx 1 ms Approx 30 ms 10000 Approx 1 ms Approx 2 ms Approx 300 ms 100000 Approx 10 ms Appro
9. CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge Function Sets or queries the voltage range of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt 1 to 500V Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE 10 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT VRANGE 10 5 38 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30
10. vertical zoom factor 16CH voltage ssussss 5 54 vertical zoom factor acceleration sssss 5 33 vertical zoom factor analog voltage 5 51 vertical zoom factor frequency 5 43 vertical zoom factor logic 5 44 WOMAG E t DEPO 4 6 voltage range frequency rrr 5 38 W waveform accumulation number of waveform acquisition M waveform acquisitions number of sssssssss waveform interpolation sssseeee waveform label frequency waveform label MATH waveform saving GO NO GO s Window1 and Window2 combined display 5 137 WINdOW ayot casina 5 140 Z zoom factor capture a ZOOM OST OM RR Tm IM DL850 17EN Index 3
11. sssseeeeeeen nee 3 1 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional sssssssssssssseneeeeneneen enne 3 2 GP IB Interface Features nin ace ie ieri eet e Dee RE R Do ERE eub ew 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications iisi iiini iiiaae nnne 3 5 Configuring the DL850 DL850V GP IB Settings sen 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages ssssssssssssssssseseseeeeeeren ennt nnne 3 7 Programming Overview 4 1 NWSSSAG SS IM 4 1 4 2 ero noe H E 4 3 4 3 RESPONSE mysy roni su senaedeaacteaetauiintes eSIDISDLIERIIISD Ice I Pde IRI lS ISIIL De Rc RSEN CEN ts 4 5 44 Dre M wtazeets 4 6 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller esee 4 8 Commands 5 1 List Of Commands E Raa 5 1 5 2 AC QUIRGGiOU Piri coat sade ts 5 25 5 3 ASE DUD Group m 5 27 5 4 erue ER 5 28 5 5 CAPTURE Group herbe tet thi eni Ir iid ped cie dies 5 29 5 6 Gi SANRSITKETCoDU oec EE 5 32 5 7 CLEar Group PR 5 55 5 8 eren Ie NC rojo 5 56 5 9 ei engem 5 58 S10 Piz ECa eH 5 70 Del T EVENEGIOUD3 iren rte ra eicere ez edi peace ea coee anao e XR ERE Fo race c des deen aie 5 73 5 12 PRT Groups 5 74 549 JIEE OrOUp idee dte edid fet eas atender dei
12. CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt Function Sets or queries a bit label of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module when the sub channel s data type is logic Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 BLABel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 16 characters CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL1 AAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BLABEL1 gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELI BLABEL1 AAA Example Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to LOGic 5 36 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries the label of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt LABel CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 1 to 60 on firmware versions 1 2 and later lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL AAAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 LABEL AAAA CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the channel is displayed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay lt Boo
13. 5 4 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Executes strain balancing on an installed strain module 5 44 EXECute CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth Sets or queries the filter of an installed strain module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation Sets or queries the bridge voltage of an installed strain module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor Sets or queries the gauge factor of an installed strain module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 45 installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed strain module 5 45 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 45 AVALue an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for 5 45 BVALue an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed strain 5 45 DISPlaytype module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an 5 45 DISPlaytyp
14. CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the data type of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 35 VTYPe Value Type module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the byte count of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 35 BCOunt Byte Count module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the scaling constant value per pit of a sub channel on a 5 36 FACTor CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet Sets or queries the scaling constant offset value of a sub channel on a CAN 5 36 bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SCALe Sets or queries the display range values upper and lower limits of a sub 5 36 channel on a CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 36 module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries the unit of data of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 36 module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BLABel lt x gt Sets or queries a bit label of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module 5 36 when the sub channel s data type is logic CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Sets or queries the label of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module 5 37 LABel CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay Sets or queries whether the channel is
15. GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the measurement item for the 5 83 TYPE lt Parameter gt specified waveform parameter GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries the measured value of the specified waveform parameter 5 83 VALue GONogo REMote Sets or queries the remote mode of GO NO GO determination 5 83 GONogo SEQuence Sets or queries the action mode of GO NO GO determination 5 83 GONogo TRANge Sets or queries the determination range of GO NO GO determination 5 83 GONogo ZONE Queries all waveform zone determination settings 5 83 GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified determination pattern for waveform zone 5 83 determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe Queries whether the specified determination pattern for waveform zone 5 83 determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s reference condition for 5 83 waveform zone determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s determination waveform 5 84 for waveform zone determination IM DL850 17EN 5 13 5 1 List of Commands Command Function P
16. 5 136 IM DL850 17EN 5 36 XY Group The commands in this group deal with the XY display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT DISPLAY X Y keys on the front panel XY Function Queries all XY settings Syntax XY XY CDISplay Combine Display Function Sets or queries whether to combine the displays of Window1 and Window2 on the XY waveform display Syntax XY CDISplay lt Boolean gt XY CDISplay Example XY CDISPLAY ON XY CDISPLAY gt XY CDISPLAY 1 XY DOTConnect Function Sets or queries whether dot connect is ON or OFF for XY waveforms Syntax XY DOTConnect lt Boolean gt XY DOTConnect Example XY DOTCONNECT ON XY DOTCONNECT gt XY DOTCONNECT 1 XY DECimation Function Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that XY waveforms use Syntax XY DECimation lt NRf gt XY DECimation lt NR gt 2000 100000 Example XY DECIMATION 2000 XY DECIMATION XY DECIMATION 2000 XY MARKer Function Sets or queries whether XY pen markers are on Syntax XY MARKer Boolean XY MARKer Example XY MARKER ON XY MARKER gt XY MARKER 1 XY TCLear Trace Clear On Start Function Sets or queries whether the XY trace clear on start feature is on Syntax XY TCLear lt Boolean gt XY TCLear Example XY TCLEAR ON XY TCLEAR gt XY TCLEAR 1 XY WINDow lt x gt Function Queries all settings rel
17. CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse Function Sets or queries the distance per pulse of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse lt x gt 1 to 16 NRf 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DPULSE 1 00000E 00 CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DPULSE CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DPULSE 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Function Queries all the filter settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer 5 40 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing Function Queries all the smoothing settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE Function Sets or queries whether smoothing is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing MODE x to 16 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE ON CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING MODE 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue Function Sets or queries the moving average order of smoothing of an in
18. Probe power supply output PROBEPOWER An error occurs if there is a query after this command Initializes settings RST RST Description This command also clears the OPC and OPC SRE Function Syntax Example commands that have been sent Sets or queries the service request enable register value SRE NRf SRE NRf 0 to 255 SRE 239 SRE gt 175 STB Function Syntax Example Description TST Function Syntax Example Description WAI Function Syntax Example Description Queries the status byte register value STB STB gt 4 This command returns a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format Because the register is read without executing serial polling bit 6 is an MSS bit not an ROS bit For example if a value of 4 is returned this indicates that the status byte register is set to 00000100 This means that the error queue is not empty in other words an error occurred Aquery using STB will not clear the contents of the status byte register For information about the status byte register see page 6 2 Performs a self test and queries the result The Self test consists of tests of each kind of internal memory TST TST gt 0 This command returns 0 if the self test is successful and 1 otherwise Holds the execution of the subsequent command until the specified overlap command is completed WAI WAI For detai
19. CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe x 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE 250 250 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCALE 250 000E 00 250 000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VARiable Function Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage VARiable Boolean CHANnel x VOLTage VARiable x to 16 Example CHANNELI1 VOLTAGE VARIABLE 0 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VARIABLE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VARIABLE 0 Description On the DL850 DL850V the menu title is V Scale OFF corresponds to the DIV setting and ON corresponds to the SPAN setting 5 50 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV Function Sets or queries the V div setting of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage VDIV lt Voltage gt lt Current gt CHANnel x VOLTage VDIV x to 16 Voltage 10mV div to 20V div 720210 when the probe attenuation is 1 1 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV 50 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE VDIV 50 Description List of Selectable Ranges and Initial Values per Voltage Module Type 1 1 probe attenuation me Selecta
20. LSTart Function Starts waveform acquisition immediately and waits for acquisition to complete Syntax LSTart Example LSTart gt 0 Description When acquisition is complete this command returns 0 IM DL850 17EN puewwoy 5 20 MATH Group The commands in this group deal with computations You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the MATH key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN MATH lt x gt Function Queries all computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH lt x gt AVERage Function Queries all averaging computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH x AVERage CCOunt Function Sets or queries the cycle count of cycle averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt NRf MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs he same no matter what value you pecify NRf 10 to 1800 Example MATH1 AVERAGE CCOUNT 720 MATH1 AVERAGE CCOUNT gt MATHIl AVERAGE CCOUNT 720 Description This
21. MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue Function Sets or queries a set of upper and lower limits for manual scaling Syntax MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E430 Example MATH1 SCALE VALUE 1 1 MATH1 SCALE VALUE gt MATH1 SCALE VALUE 1 00000E 00 1 00000E 00 puewwoy MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TIME Function Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when the internal clock is used Syntax MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt TIME lt Time gt MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TIME lt Time gt MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt TIME MATHEKx SHIFt CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt TIME MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Time 0 s to 2592000 s 720 hours T Div x 5 Step 1 sample rate Example MATH1 SHIFT CHANNEL1 TIME 0 001 MATH1 SHIFT CHANNEL1 TIME gt MATH1 SHIFT CHANNELI TIME 1 000000000E 03 IM DL850 17EN 5 95 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt UNIT Function Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to computation results Syntax MATH lt x gt UNIT String MATH lt x gt UNIT MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example MATH1 UNIT UU MATH1 UNIT gt MATH1 UNIT UU
22. SEARch POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the position of a zoom box 5 110 SEARCh TDIV lt x gt Sets or queries a zoom waveform T DIV value 5 110 SNAP Group SNAP Takes a snapshot 5 111 SSTart Group SSTart Executes the single start operation 5 112 SSTart lt NRf gt Executes the single start operation and waits for its completion by using a 5 112 timeout valuer STARt Group STARt Starts waveform acquisition 5 113 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page TATus Group STATus Queries all the settings for the communication status feature 5 114 STATus CONDition Queries the contents of the condition register 5 114 STATus EESE Sets or queries the extended event enable register 5 114 STATus EESR Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register 5 114 STATus ERRor Queries the error code and message of the last error that has occurred 5 114 STATus FILTer lt x gt Sets or queries the transition filter 5 114 STATus QENable Sets or queries whether messages other than errors will be stored to the 5 114 error queue ON or not OFF STATus OMESsage Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the 5 114 response to the STAT ERR query ON or not OFF STOP Group STOP Stops wav
23. Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe Function Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Example CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F STATE ON CURSOR FFT PEAKl1 F STATE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F STATE 1 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALue Function Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALue lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Example CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F VALUE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK1 F VALUE 2 0000000E 03 IM DL850 17EN 5 59 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Example CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE ON CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y STATE 1 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of
24. 5 23 MTRigger Group The command in this group deals with manual triggers MTRigger Function Manually triggers the DL850 DL850V Syntax MTRigger Example MTRIGGER 5 106 IM DL850 17EN 5 24 RECall Group RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute Function Recalls setup data from an internal memory area Syntax RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute lt x gt 1 to 3 Example RECALL SETUP1 EXECUTE Description If you specify an area that does not contain setup data an error occurs IM DL850 17EN 5 107 puewwoy 5 25 SEARch Group The commands in this group deal with searching for and extracting patterns from acquired waveforms You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT ZOOM keys on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN SEARCh Function Queries all search settings Syntax SEARCh SEARch ABORt Function Aborts the search Syntax SEARch ABORt Example SEARCH ABORT SEARch EDGE Function Queries all edge search settings Syntax SEARCh EDGE SEARCh EDGE COUNt Function Sets or queries the edge search count Syntax SEARCh EDGE COUNt lt NRf gt
25. CURSor TY TYPE Function Sets or queries the cursor type on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY TYPE OFF HORizontal VERTical MARKer DEGRee HAVertical CURSor TY TYPE Example CURSOR TY TYPE MARKER CURSOR TY TYPE gt CURSOR TY TYPE MARKER CURSor TY VERTical Function Queries all V cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical CURSor TY VERTical DX Function Queries all AX value settings AX is between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DX CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue Function Queries the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX VALUE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DX VALUE 3 0000000E 03 Description When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time between markers When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the frequency between markers When an External Clock is Being Used as the Time Base This queries the number of poin
26. FILE DIRECTORY DRIVE HD Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850 DL850V internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850 DL850V this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 FILE DIRectory FREE Function Queries the free space on the medium that is being operated on in bytes Syntax FILE DIRectory FREE Example FILE DIRECTORY FREE gt FILE DIRECTORY FREE 3 7567939E 09 FILE DIRectory MDIRectory Make Directory Function Creates a directory in the current directory Syntax FILE DIRectory MDIRectory lt String gt Example FILE DIRECTORY MDIRECTORY NO 1 Description String specifies a relative path IM DL850 17EN 5 77 puewwoy 5 13 FILE Group FILE DIRectory PATH Function Queries the current directory Syntax FILE DIRectory PATH Example FILE DIRECTORY PATH gt FILR PATH Path HD 1 20090506 FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP ABORt Function Aborts the loading of various types of data Syntax FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP ABORt Example FILE LOAD SNAP ABOR FILE LOAD B
27. IM DL850 17EN 5 11 EVENt Group You can use the commands in this group to set data for and query data from events such as dual capture and external terminal input events EVENt Function Queries all event waveform settings Syntax EVENt EVENt DCAPture MODE Function Sets or queries whether the event waveform s dual capture events are displayed Syntax EVENt DCAPture MODE lt Boolean gt EVENt DCAPture MODE Example EVENT DCAPTURE MODE ON EVENT DCAPTURE MODE EVENT DCAPTURE MODE 1 EVENt MEVent MODE Manual Event Function Sets or queries whether the event waveform s manual events are displayed Syntax EVENt MEVent MODE lt Boolean gt EVENt MEVent MODE Example EVENT MEVENT MODE ON EVENT MEVENT MODE EVENT MEVENT MODE ON EVENt MEVent EXECute Function Manually inserts an event Syntax EVENt MEVent EXECute EVENt MEVent SLOPe Function Sets or queries the manual event external event terminal polarity Syntax EVENt MEVent SLOPe FALL RISE EVENt MEVent SLOPe Example EVENT MEVENT SLOPE RISE EVENT MEVENT SLOPE EVENT MEVENT SLOPE RISE IM DL850 17EN 5 73 pueululo 5 12 FFT Group The commands in this group deal with FFT analysis You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT MATH keys on the front panel FFT Function Queries all FFT settings Syntax FFT FFT AVERage Function Q
28. IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the modes of a set of high and low points rising time and 5 100 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod falling time measurement references MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the setting of a waveform parameter measurement item 5 100 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a 5 100 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt waveform parameter MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter 5 101 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXim um MEAN MINimum SDEViation MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter 5 101 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe measurement item is ON or OFF MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter 5 101 x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue MEASure XY lt x gt Queries all the settings for automated measurement of XY waveform 5 101 parameters MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Queries all the settings of a waveform parameter measurement item 5 101 MEASure XY lt x gt
29. TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI HYSTERESIS TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 HYSTERESIS HIGH TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt LEVel Function Sets or queries the specified channel s level for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt LEVel lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt CHannel lt x gt LEVel CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL 1 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 LEVEL 1 Example TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh Function Sets or queries the window trigger width for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH 2 TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 WIDTH 2 TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt WWIDth Function Sets or queries the width for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel x WWIDth lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt
30. TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt WWIDth CHANnel x s x 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH 0 5 x TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH gt TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL1 WWIDTH TRIGger TGTime Function Queries all T gt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TGTime 5 130 IM DL850 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger TGTime TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T Time triggers Syntax TRIGger TGTime TIME Time TRIGger TGTime TIME Time 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER TGTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER TGTIME TIME gt TRIGGER TGTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger TIMer Function Queries all time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TIMer TRIGger TIMer DATE Function Sets or queries the date for time triggers Syntax TRIGger TIMer DATE String TRIGger TIMer DATE String YYYY MM DD YYYY 2000 to 2099 Example TRIGGER TIMER DATE 2010 01 01 TRIGGER TIMER DATE TRIGGER TIMER DATE 2010 01 01 TRIGger TIMer INTerval Function Sets or queries the trigger interval for time triggers Syntax TRIGger TIMer INTerval SEC10 SEC15 SEC20 SEC30 SEC40 SEC50 MIN1 MIN2 MIN3 MIN4 MIN5 MIN6 MIN7 MIN8 MIN9 MIN10 MIN15 MIN20 MIN25 MINS30 MINA40 MIN45 MIN50 HOUR HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOUR8 HOUR9 HOUR10 HOUR11 HOUR12 HOUR18 HOUR24 TRIGger TIMer INT
31. ACQUIRE RLENGTH 10000 ACQuire RTOut Function Syntax Queries all hard disk recording settings ACQuire RTOut IM DL850 17EN 5 25 5 2 ACQuire Group ACQuire RTOut ANAMing Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording auto naming feature Syntax ACQuire RTOut ANAMing DATE NUMBering Example ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING DATE ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING gt ACQUIRE RTOUT ANAMING DATE ACQuire RTOut COMMent Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording comment Syntax ACQuire RTOut COMMent String String Up to 120 characters Example ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT ABC ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT gt ACQUIRE RTOUT COMMENT ABC ACQuire RTOut FILename Function Sets or queries the hard disk recording file name Syntax ACQuire RTOut FILename String String Up to 16 characters Example ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME ABC ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME gt ACQUIRE RTOUT FILENAME ABC ACQuire RTOut MODE Function Sets or queries whether hard disk recording is enabled Syntax ACQuire RTOut MODE HD OFF Example ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE OFF ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE gt ACQUIRE RTOUT MODE OFF ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE Function Sets or queries whether divided recording is enabled for hard disk recording Syntax ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE lt Boolean gt Example ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE ON ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE gt ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE MODE 1 ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBe
32. CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle 5 60 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee D X VALue Queries the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on the T Y 5 60 display CURSor TY DEGRee DD Queries all angle difference Ad value settings The angle difference is 5 60 between the angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference Ad value between the angle 5 60 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue Queries the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the 5 60 T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DY Queries all angle difference AY value settings The angle difference is 5 60 between the angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe Sets or queries whether the angle difference AY value between the angle 5 61 cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee DY VALue Queries the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the 5 61 T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt Sets or queries an angle cursor position on the T Y display 5 61 CURSor TY DEGRee Sets or queries the angle reference start Ref1 or end Ref2 point on the 5 61 REFerence lt x T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue Sets or queries an angle cursor s re
33. SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit x1 1 3 b T 9 ll 13 15 x2 to 16 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure Function Syntax Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2X x1 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale MODE x1 2 01 4 3 5 Tr 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE AXB CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE MODE OFF CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the line
34. SEARCH EDGE SLOPE SEARCH EDGE SLOPE RISE SEARch EDGE SOURce Function Sets or queries the trace to perform the edge search on Syntax SEARCh EDGE SOURce lt NRf gt lt NRf gt SEARch EDGE SOURce lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt If the channel has sub channels this is the range of sub channel numbers Example SEARCH EDGE SOURCE 1 SEARCH EDGE SOURCE gt SEARCH EDGE SOURCE 1 Description If no module is installed you cannot select the edge search SEARch EVENt Function Queries all event search settings Syntax SEARch EVENt 5 108 IM DL850 17EN 5 25 SEARch Group SEARCh EVENt COUNt Function Sets or queries the event search event number Syntax SEARCh EVENt COUNt lt NRf gt SEARch EVENt COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example SEARCH EVENT COUNT 1 SEARCH EVENT COUNT gt SEARCH EVENT COUNT 1 SEARch EVENt SOURce Function Sets or queries the event search source event Syntax SEARCh EVENt SOURce CAPTure MANual SEARCh EVENt SOURCe Example SEARCH EVENT SOURCE CAPTURE SEARCH EVENT SOURCE SEARCH EVENT SOURCE CAPTURE SEARCh EXECute Function Executes the search This is an overlap command Syntax SEARch EXECute SEARch LSTate Function Queries all logic pattern search settings Syntax SEARCh LSTate SEARch LSTate BIT x Function Sets or queries the level of the specified bit for logi
35. Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal DY VALue Example CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE 300 00000E 00 CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a horizontal cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt NRf CURSor TY HORizontal POSition lt x gt x 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 in steps of 1 100 Example CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 3 CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL POSITION2 3 00 CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the horizontal cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe lt NRf gt to 16 x 1 to 8 lt NRf gt to 16 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel Example CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL T Q Q URSOR TY HORIZONTAL T URSOR TY HORIZONTAL T RACE 1 RACE gt RACE 1 CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Function Queries all Y axis settings of the horizontal cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a horizontal cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal Y l
36. internal memory the data of a sub channel on a CAN bus module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer BIG LITTle CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER BIG CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BORDER BIG puewwoy CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe Value Type Function Sets or queries the data type of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe UNSigned SIGNed LOGic UNSigned FLOat SIGNed LOGic on firmware versions 1 2 and later CHANnel lt x gt s x 13 to 16 SCHANnel x s x 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELI VTYPE SIGNED CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 VTYPE SIGNED CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BCOunt Byte Count Function Sets or queries the byte count of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BCOunt AUTO lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 8 Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCOUNT 8 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCOUNT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BCOUNT 8 IM DL850 17EN 5 35 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt FACTor Function Sets or queries the scaling constant
37. 0 is returned as soon as the measurement finishes IM DL850 17EN 5 103 puewwoy 5 22 MONitor Group The commands in this group deal with switching the screen that is displayed and the output of the numeric monitor MONitor ASENd Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels Syntax MONitor ASENd Example MONITOR ASEND gt See the response format shown in the figure below Description The measured values of each channel are divided by semicolons 0x3b The values for all active channels are output Depending on the MONitor VERBose command s setting the measured value is returned with a label and the unit or just the measured value is returned The active channels are those that meet the following conditions For two channel modules they are the channels that are displayed For 16 channel modules they are the sub channels that are displayed and whose input is off Logic channels follow the same guidelines explained here The measured value is right justified The unit is returned as white space Response Format Ici TaM TTE L JL JL Label 8 char Measured value Unit 4 char 11 char right justified MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel Syntax MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x
38. 1 to 60 minute Example SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME 10 SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME SYSTEM LCD AUTO TIME 10 SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness Function Sets or queries the LCD brightness Syntax SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD BRIGhtness NRf 1 to 10 Example SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 3 SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS SYSTEM LCD BRIGHTNESS 3 SYSTem LCD MODE Function Sets or queries whether the backlight is on Syntax SYSTem LCD MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem LCD MODE Example SYSTEM LCD MODE ON SYSTEM LCD MODE SYSTEM LCD MODE 1 SYSTem LOGic Function Queries all logic display settings Syntax SYSTem LOGic SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Numerical Format Function Sets or queries the numeric display format of logic module data Syntax SYSTem LOGic NFORmat BIT HEXadecimal SYSTem LOGic NFORmat Example SYSTEM LOGIC NFORMAT BIT SYSTEM LOGIC NFORMAT gt SYSTEM LOGIC NFORMAT BIT Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modules installed in them puewwoy SYSTem LOGic CORDer Cursor Order Function Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you use cursors to display logic module data as bits Syntax SYSTem LOGic CORDer LSBFirst MSBFirst SYSTem LOGic CORDer Example SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER LSBFIRST SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER SYSTEM LOGIC CORDER LSBFIRST Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modu
39. 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2X x to 16 Example CHANnell FREQ LSCale GETMeasure P1X CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s NRf 9 9999E425 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 Example CHANNEL FREQ LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT
40. 5 118 SYSTem IRIG FORMat Sets or queries the IRIG format for synchronizing the time through IRIG 5 118 signals SYSTem IRIG MODulation Sets or queries the IRIG modulation type for synchronizing the time through 5 118 IRIG signals SYSTem IRIG IMPedance Sets or queries the input impedance for synchronizing the time through IRIG 5 118 signals SYSTem KEYResponse Sets or queries the response time of the START STOP key 5 118 SYSTem KEYProtect Queries all key lock settings 5 118 SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Sets or queries whether the keys are locked 5 118 SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Sets or queries which keys will be locked 5 118 SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Sets or queries how to release the key lock 5 118 Release TYPe SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword Enters the password to release the key lock 5 118 Enter password SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword Sets the password that is used to release the key lock 5 118 Set password SYSTem LANGuage Sets or queries the message language 5 119 SYSTem LCD Queries all LCD settings 5 119 SYSTem LCD AUTO Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the 5 119 backlight SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Sets or queries whether the feature that automatically turns off the backlight 5 119 is on IM DL850 17EN 5 19 spuewwog 5 1 List of Commands
41. 5 120 SYSTem STORage MEDia Sets or queries the medium that you want to format 5 120 SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Formats the specified medium This is an overlap command 5 120 SYSTem TSYNchro Time Sets or queries the time synchronization 5 120 Synchronization SYSTem USBKeyboard Sets or queries the USB keyboard type 5 120 TIMebase Group TIMebase Queries all time base settings 5 121 TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe Queries the sample rate of the specified channel 5 121 TIMebase SOURce Sets or queries the time base 5 121 TIMebase SRATe Sets or queries the sample rate 5 121 TIMebase TDIV Sets or queries the T DIV value 5 121 TRIGger Group TRIGger Queries all trigger settings 5 122 TRIGger ABN A gt B n Queries all A gt B n trigger settings 5 122 TRIGger ABN COUNt Sets or queries the number of times condition B must be met for A gt B n 5 122 triggers TRIGger ACTion Queries all action on trigger settings 5 122 TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as an action 5 122 TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Sets or queries whether an screen capture is printed from the built in printer 5 122 as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Queries all settings for saving screen captures as an action on trigger 5 122 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved to the storage medium as 5 122 an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Sets or queries the current directory on the storag
42. 5 88 HISTory ZONE EDIT x CONDition Sets or queries the specified search zone s search condition 5 88 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce Sets or queries the specified search zone s source waveform 5 88 HISTory ZONE LOGic Sets or queries the logic condition of history waveform zone searches 5 88 IMAGe Group IMAGe Queries all screen capture data output settings 5 89 MAGe BACKground Sets or queries the screen capture background png 5 89 MAGe COMMent Sets or queries the screen comment 5 89 MAGe EXECute Saves the screen capture data 5 89 MAGe FORMat Sets or queries the screen capture output format 5 89 MAGe SAVE Queries all file output settings 5 89 MAGe SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the setting of the auto naming feature for saving files 5 89 MAGe SAVE CDIRectory Changes the output destination directory 5 89 MAGe SAVE DRIVe Sets the output destination medium 5 89 MAGe SAVE FRAMe Sets or queries whether a white frame is attached to the saved screen 5 89 capture s image IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page IMAGe SAVE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved 5 89 IMAGe SAVE PATH Queries the current directory 5 89 IMAGe SEND Queries the screen capture data 5 89 IMAGe TONE Set
43. 5 96 IM DL850 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group The commands in this group deal with the automated measurement of waveform parameters You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the MEASURE key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN MEASure Function Queries all the settings for automated measurement of waveform parameters Syntax MEASure MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sets or queries whether all the waveform parameters of the specified channel are ON or OFF Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Description For channels that have sub channels use the MEAS CHAN SCH command MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt ALL Function Sets all the measurement items of the specified channel to ON or OFF Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt ALL lt Boolean gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt ALL lt Boolean gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANN
44. COMMunicate REMote lt Boolean gt COMMunicate REMote COMMUNICATE REMOTE ON COMMUNICATE REMOTE COMMUNICATE REMOTE 1 Description This command is designed for use in USB and Ethernet communications Example COMMunicate VERBose Function Sets or queries whether query responses are returned in full or abbreviated form Syntax COMMunicate VERBose lt Boolean gt COMMunicate VERBose COMMUNICATE VERBOSE ON COMMUNICATE VERBOSE COMMUNICATE VERBOSE 1 Description This setting is lost when the DL850 DL850V is Example turned off COMMunicate WAIT Function Waits for a specified extended event to occur Syntax COMMunicate WAIT Register Register 0 to 65535 extended event register Example COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 5 56 IM DL850 17EN 5 8 COMMunicate Group COMMunicate WAIT Function Syntax Example Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event occurs COMMunicate WAIT Register lt Register gt 0 to 65535 extended event register COMMUNICATE WAIT 65535 gt 1 HEHBEUHH peal o o al olo 0 ISCH When bit 5 PRN 1 Printer operation is incomplete When bit 6 ACS 1 Media access is incomplete When bit 8 HST 1 History searching is incomplete When bit 11 SCH 1 Edge searching is incomplete IM DL850 17EN 5 57 puewwoy 5 9 CURSor Group The commands in this group deal with c
45. CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE ON CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX STATE 1 Example CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue Function Queries the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a V cursor position on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor XY VERTical POSition x x 1 2 Example CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 3 CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL POSITION1 3 00 Description You can query cursor position information for cursors XY1 to XY8 Use the CURSor XY VERTical TRACe command to specify the waveform that you want to query CURSor XY VERTical TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical TRACe XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 XY6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY VERTical TRACe CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE XY2 CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL TRACE XY2 Example CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt Function Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X l
46. Description This command balances channels that are switched on with the CHANnel lt x1 gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x2 gt command lt x gt can be any number provided that it corresponds to the number of a channel of a strain module 5 44 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth Function Sets or queries the filter of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain BWIDth lt Frequency gt 10Hz 100Hz 1kHz Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH 10 00E 00 CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN BWIDTH 10 00E 00 CHANnel lt x gt STRain EXCitation Function Sets or queries the bridge voltage of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel x STRain EXCitation lt Voltage gt CHANnel x STRain EXCitation Voltage 2V 5V 10V Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION 5 CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN EXCITATION 5 CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor Function Sets or queries the gauge factor of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain GFACtor lt NR gt 1 90 to 2 20 Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR 1 9 CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN GFACTOR 1 90 CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert Function Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an
47. FFT Group FFT Queries all FFT settings 5 74 AVERage Queries all FFT averaging settings 5 74 AVERage MODE Sets or queries the FFT averaging mode 5 74 AVERage TYPE Sets or queries the averaging domain 5 74 FFT AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging 5 74 gt FFT AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 74 gt FFT POINt Sets or queries the number of analysis source points of the FFT windows 5 74 FFT STARt Sets or queries the analysis source start point of the FFT windows 5 74 WINDow Queries all FFT analysis settings 5 74 WINDow TYPE Sets or queries the computation window type for FFT analysis 5 74 FFT WINDow EXPonential Queries all FFT exponential window settings 5 74 FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s damping rate 5 74 FFT WINDow EXPonential Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s Force1 or Force2 value 5 75 FORCe lt x gt gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt Queries all FFT window settings 5 75 gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis type 5 75 IM DL850 17EN spuewwog 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe Sub Sets or queries an FFT window s
48. HISTory ZONE LOGic Example HISTORY ZONE LOGIC AND HISTORY ZONE LOGIC HISTORY ZONE LOGIC AND 5 88 IM DL850 17EN 5 17 IMAGe Group The commands in this group deal with saving screen capture data You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT SAVE keys on the front panel IMAGe Function Queries all screen capture data output settings Syntax IMAGe IMAGe BACKground Function Sets or queries the screen capture background png Syntax IMAGe BACKground NORMal TRANsparent IMAGe BACKground Example IMAGE BACKGROUND NORMAL IMAGE BACKGROUND gt IMAGE BACKGROUND NORMAL IMAGe COMMent Function Sets or queries the screen comment Syntax IMAGe COMMent lt String gt IMAGe COMMent String Up to 26 characters Example IMAGE COMMENT ABC IMAGE COMMENT IMAGE COMMENT ABC IMAGe EXECute Function Saves the screen capture data Syntax IMAGe EXECute Example IMAGE EXECUTE IMAGe FORMat Function Sets or queries the screen capture output format Syntax IMAGe FORMat BMP JPEG PNG IMAGe FORMat Example IMAGE FORMAT PNG IMAGE FORMAT IMAGE FORMAT PNG IMAGe SAVE Function Queries all file output settings Syntax IMAGe SAVE IMAGe SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the setting of the auto naming feature for saving files Syntax
49. MATH lt x2 gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace lt xl gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 sub channel x2 1 to 8 XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE 1 XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE gt XY WAVEFORM1 XTRACE 1 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace Function Syntax Example Description You cannot select the channel of a logic module Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s Y axis XY WAVeform cxl YTRace lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x2 gt XY WAVeform lt x1 gt YTRace lt xl gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 sub channel x2 1 to 8 XY WAVEFORMI YTRACE 2 XY WAVEFORM1 YTRACE gt XY WAVEFORM1 YTRACE 2 5 138 IM DL850 17EN 5 37 ZOOM Group The commands in this group deal with the zoomed display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the ZOOM key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN ZOOM Function Queries all zoom settings Syntax ZOOM ZOOM ASCRo11 Function Queries all auto scroll settings Syntax ZOOM ASCRo11 ZOOM ASCRo11 JUMP Function Moves the center position of the zoom box to the left or right edge
50. SEARch EDGE COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000000 Example SEARCH EDGE COUNT 100 SEARCH EDGE COUNT gt SEARCH EDGE COUNT 100 SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the edge search determination level hysteresis Syntax SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le SEARch EDGE HYSTeresis Example SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS LOW SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS gt SEARCH EDGE HYSTERESIS LOW Description This setting is valid if the channel that is being searched is not a logic channel SEARch EDGE LEVE1 Function Sets or queries the edge search determination level Syntax SEARCh EDGE LEVEl lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt SEARCh EDGE LEVE1 Example SEARCH EDGE LEVEL 2 SEARCH EDGE LEVEL gt SEARCH EDGE LEVEL 2 00000E 00 SEARCh EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the edge polarity of the specified bit for when the edge search is performed on logic traces Syntax SEARCh EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt BISLope OFF FALL RISE SEARCh EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 8 Example SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 BISLOPE SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 gt SEARCH EDGE LOGIC BIT1 BISLOPE SEARch EDGE SLOPe Function Sets or queries the edge polarity for when the edge search is performed on traces other than logic traces Syntax SEARCh EDGE SLOPe BISLope FALL RISE SEARCh EDGE SLOPe Example SEARCH EDGE SLOPE RISE
51. Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence COUNt NRf MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence COUNt lt NR gt lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE CHANNEL DELAY REFERENCE COUNT MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE COUNT 1 5 98 IM DL850 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe Function Sets or queries the edge detection slope of the reference waveform used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe RISE FALL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SLOPe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE RISE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SLOPE RISE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SOURcCe Function Sets or queries whether to set the reference point for measuring the delay between channels for a waveform to a trigger point or to a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence SOURce TRACe TRIGger MEASure CHANnel lt x gt
52. TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries whether the specified source waveform of the specified 5 139 group display of zoom waveforms is displayed ZOOM MAG lt x gt Sets or queries the horizontal magnification of the specified zoom waveform 5 140 ZOOM MAIN Sets or queries the proportion of the main waveform display area that is used 5 140 when zooming waveforms ZOOM MODE lt x gt Sets or queries whether the specified zoom waveform is displayed 5 140 ZOOM MOVE Sets or queries whether the movement of the zoom position to the latest 5 140 position is enabled or disabled ZOOM POSition lt x gt Sets or queries the zoom position of the specified zoom waveform 5 140 ZOOM TDIV lt x gt Sets or queries the T DIV value of the specified zoom waveform 5 140 200M WLAYout Window Layout Sets or queries the window layout that is used when waveforms are zoomed 5 140 ZOOM Z2Target Sets or queries the source window of Z2 when both Z1 and Z2 are displayed 5 140 Common Command Group CAL Executes calibration and queries the result 5 141 CLS Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue 5 141 ESE Sets or queries the standard event enable register 5 141 ESR Queries and clears the standard event register 5 141 IDN Queries the DL850 DL850V model 5 141 OPC Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the 5 141 completion of the specified overlap command OPC Returns ASCII code 1 when the sp
53. Unit Unit lt RMT gt RMT stands for response message terminator The response message terminator is NL END IM DL850 17EN M JA AQ BuruiueJj80Jd 4 1 Messages Response Message Unit Syntax The response message unit syntax is as follows Response data BE Response header Space Response Header A response header sometimes precedes the response data A space separates the data from the header For details see page 4 5 Response Data Response data contains the content of the response If there are multiple data values each data value is separated by a comma For details see page 4 5 Example 1 25E 02 RMT ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt V n Sc J Data Header Data If there are multiple queries in a program message responses are returned in the same order that the queries were received in In most cases a single query returns a single response message unit but there are a few queries that return multiple units The first response message unit always corresponds to the first query but the nth response unit may not necessarily correspond to the nth query If you want to make sure that every response is retrieved divide the program messages into individual messages Precautions to Be Taken when Exchanging Messages If the controller sends a program message that does not contain a query the controller can send th
54. VERTICAL Y1 STATE 1 IM DL850 17EN 5 65 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY VERTical Y x VALue Function Queries the Y axis value measured value of a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical Y x VALue x 1 2 CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y2 VALUE 333 33333E 03 Description When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base Example When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the frequency f you have set the waveform that you want to measure to ALL all the measured values from the channels sub channels and Math channels of all the installed modules will be returned NAN will be returned for any unused channels and channels that do not have modules installed in their corresponding slots For modules that have sub channels the measured values of all sub channels will be returned NAN will be returned for any sub channels whose input is turned off CURSor XY Function Queries all cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY CURSor XY HORizontal Function Queries all H cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal CURSor XY HORizontal DY Function Queries all AY axis value settings The AY axis value is between the H cursors on the X Y display Sy
55. lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE UNIT UU Example puewwoy CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MO CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MO CHANNEL1 FREQ LSCALE MO MODE DE AXB DE DE AXB IM DL850 17EN 5 39 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet Function Sets or queries the offset of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet NRf Frequency Time CHANnel lt x gt FREQ OFFSet lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ OFFSET 1 CHANNEL5 FREQ OFFSET CHANNEL5 FREQ OFFSET 0 000000E 00 Description lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting See the DL850 DL850V Features Guide for this information CHANnel lt x gt FREQ POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel x FREQ POSition lt NRf gt CHANne1l lt x gt FREQ POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 NRf 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNEL5S FREQ POSITION 1 00 HANNEL5 FREQ POSITION gt HANNEL5 FREQ POSITION 0 00 Q Q CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the s
56. x Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the T Y display 5 65 VALue CURSor TY VERTical Y lt x gt Queries all Y axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display 5 65 CURSor TY VERTical Y x Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is 5 65 STATe displayed CURSor TY VERTical Y x Queries the Y axis value measured value of a V cursor on the T Y display 5 66 VALue CURSor XY Queries all cursor settings for the X Y display 5 66 CURSor XY HORizontal Queries all H cursor settings for the X Y display 5 66 CURSor XY HORizontal DY Queries all AY axis value settings The AY axis value is between the H 5 66 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y 5 66 display is displayed CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue Queries the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display 5 66 CURSor XY HORizontal Sets or queries H cursor positions on the X Y display 5 66 POSition lt x gt CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the H 5 66 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY HORizontal Y x Queries all Y axis value settings for an H cursor on the X Y display 5 66 CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for an H cursor on the X Y display 5 66 STATe is displayed CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt
57. 1 to 16 lt Time gt 5ms 10ms 20ms 50ms 100ms Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 CELIMINATION 0 01 CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 CELIMINATION gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 CELIMINATION 1 0000000E 02 CHANnel x LOGic POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRi gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION 1 HANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION gt HANNEL15 LOGIC POSITION 1 00 Q Q CHANnel lt x gt LOGic ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 233 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 675 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 1 8 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC ZOOM 1 CHANNEL15 LOGIC ZOOM gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC Z00M 1 000 CHANnel lt x gt MODU1le Function Queries the module that is installed in the channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt MODUle lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Values that are returned from each module NOMODULE No module is installed in the specified channel or an even numbered
58. 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Extended event register A A 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O Transition filter AA 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Condition register IM DL850 17EN 6 1 About Status Reports Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Write Read Status byte Serial polling RQS STB MSS Service request enable Status byte mask SRE SRE register Standard event register Indicates device status changes ESR Standard event enable Standard event register mask ESE ESE register Extended event Indicates device status changes STATus EESR register Extended event enable Extended event register mask STATus EESE STATus EESE register Condition register Current device status STATus CONDition Transition filter Conditions that change the STATus FILTer x STATus FILTer lt x gt extended event register Output queue Stores response messages for Query commands queries Error Queue Stores error numbers and z STATus ERRor messages Registers and Queues That Affect the Status Byte The following registers affect the status byte bits ESB of the status byte to 1 or 0 Standard event register Sets bit 5 Output queue Sets bit 4 MAV of the status byte to 1 or O Extended event register Sets bit 3 EES of the status byte to 1 or 0 Error queue Sets bit 2 EAV of the status byte to 1 or 0 Ena
59. ASCII Character Codes The following table contains ASCII character codes 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 0 0 20 40 0 60 16 100 0 120 16 140 0 160 16 NUL DEL SP Q P p 0 0 10 16 20 32 30 48 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 1 61 17 101 1 121 17 141 1 161 17 SOH DC1 A Q a q 111 17 21 33 31 49 41 65 51 81 61 97171 113 2 22 42 2 62 18 102 2 122 18 142 2 162 18 STX DC2 B R b r 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 3 23 43 3 63 19 103 3 123 19 143 3 163 19 ETX DC3 C S c S 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 4 4 SDC 24 DCL 44 4 64 20 104 4 124 20 144 4 164 20 EOT DC4 D T d t 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 5 5 PPC 25 PPU 45 5 65 21 105 5 125 21 145 5 165 21 ENQ NAK E U e u 5 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 6 6 26 46 6 66 22 106 6 126 22 146 6 166 22 ACK SYN amp FVif v 6 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 7 27 47 7 67 23 107 7 127 23 147 7 167 23 BEL ETB G WwW g Ww 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 47 71 57 87 67 103 77 119 8 0 GET 30 SPE 50 8 70 24 110 8 130 24 150 8 170 24 BS CAN HX h x 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 48 72 58 88 68 104 78 120 9 1 TCT 31 SPD 51 9 71 25 111 9 131 25 151 91171 25 HT EM Y id y 9 19 25 29 41 39 57 49 73 59 89 69 105 79 121 A 2 32 52 10 72 26 112 10 132 26 152 10 172 26 LF SUB J Zi j z A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 4
60. DL850V Features Guide for this information Example gt CHANNELS FREQ VDIV 20 CHANNEL5 FREO VDIV gt CHANNELS FREQ VDIV 20 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NR gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 22 054 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 833 Jd 1 11 1 25 scopy 443 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ ZOOM 1 CHANNEL5 FREQ ZOOM gt CHANNEL5 FREQ ZOOM 1 CHANnel lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries the waveform label of a channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LABel String CHANnel lt x gt LABel lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example CHANNELS LABEL ABC CHANNEL5 LABEL gt CHANNELS LABEL ABC Description This setting is invalid for a module that has sub channels but it is valid for logic modules CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Function Queries all settings of an installed logic input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping Function Sets or queries the bit display method of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping AUTO FIXed CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BMAPping lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING AUTO CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING gt
61. DL850V to Return Responses without Headers You can configure the DL850 DL850V so that even responses that have both headers and data are returned without headers Use the COMMunicate HEADer command for this purpose Abbreviated Form The DL850 DL850V normally returns response headers with the lower case section removed You can configure the DL850 DL850V so that full headers are returned Use the COMMunicate VERBose command for this purpose The sections enclosed in braces are also omitted in the abbreviated form IM DL850 17EN M9IAJ9AQ Buruiuej80Jd gt 4 4 Data Data Data contains conditions and values that are written after the header A space separates the data from the header Data is grouped as follows Data Description Decimal A value expressed in decimal notation Example Probe attenuation for CH1 CHANnell PROBe 100 lt Voltage gt lt Time gt lt Frequency gt lt Current gt A physical value Time axis range gt TIMebase TDIV 1US Register A register value expressed as binary octal decimal or hexadecimal Example Extended event register value STATUS EESE HFE Character data Predefined character string mnemonic Select from the available strings in braces Example Select the input coupling of CH1 CHANnell COUPling AC DC DC50 GND lt Boolean gt Indicates on and off Specify ON OFF ora value Example Turn on
62. ESHift CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when an 5 93 SCHannel lt x gt COUNt external clock is used MATH lt x gt EXPonential Queries all exponential window settings 5 93 MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe Sets or queries the exponential window s damping rate 5 94 MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Sets or queries the exponential window s FORCe1 or FORCe2 value 5 94 MATH lt x gt FFT Queries all FFT computation settings 5 94 MATH x FFT POINt Sets or queries the number of FFT points 5 94 MATH x FFT WINDow Sets or queries the time window for FFT computations 5 94 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt Queries all digital filter settings 5 94 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND Sets or queries a digital filter band 5 94 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUToff lt x gt Sets or queries a cutoff frequency of a digital filter 5 94 MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE Sets or queries the type of a digital filter 5 94 MATH x LABel Sets or queries a computed waveform label 5 95 MATH lt x gt MODE Sets or queries whether the DL850 DL850V is in computation mode 5 95 MATH lt x gt MREFerence Sets or queries the computation range 5 95 MATH x OPERation Sets or queries the computation type 5 95 MATH lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Sets or queries a sub channel s computation type 5 95 MATH lt x gt SCALe Queries all scaling settings 5 95 MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE Sets or queries a scale m
63. Example TRIGGER ACTION MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE Function Queries all the settings related to saving data as an action on trigger Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether waveform data is saved to the storage medium as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION SAVE MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of data to save when waveform data is saved to the storage medium as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCiil BINary FLOat TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE gt TRIGGER ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Changes the current directory on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory String Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY NO 1 TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe HD NRf NETWork SD USB NR Example TRIGGER ACTION SAVE DRIVE SD puewwoy TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Function Queries the path on the storag
64. Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X x VALue x 1 2 CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 VALUE CURSOR TY VERTICAL X1 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description When the Internal Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the time When measurements are performed in the frequency Example pueululo domain this queries the frequency When an External Clock Is Being Used as the Time Base When measurements are performed in the time domain this queries the number of points using the trigger point as the reference When measurements are performed in the frequency domain this queries the number of points using the front of the waveform as the reference CURSor TY VERTical Y x Function Queries all Y axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X x x 1 2 CURSor TY VERTical Y x STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical Y x STATe Boolean CURSor TY VERTical Y x x 1 2 Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y1 STATE 1 CURSOR TY VERTICAL Y1 STATE gt CURSOR TY
65. FILTER PAVERAGE VALUE 2 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE VALUE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE VALUE 2 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion Function Sets or queries the measurement mode of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion DUTY FREQuency PERiod PFReq PINTeg PWIDth RPM RPS VELocity CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FUNCTION FREQUENCY CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FUNCTION FREQUENCY gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FUNCTION FREQUENCY IM DL850 17EN 5 41 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet Function Sets or queries whether over limit reset is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup LRESet lt Boolean gt CHANnel x FREQ SETup LRESet Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP LRESET ON CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP LRESET gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP LRESET 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse Function Sets or queries whether the measurement pulse is positive or negative for an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse POSitive NEGative CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup MPULse CHANNELS FREQ SETUP MPULSE POSITIVE CHANNELS FREQ SETUP MPULSE gt CHANNELS FREQ SETUP MPULSE POSITIVE Syntax Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate Function
66. IMAGe DRIVe HD NR f NETWork SD USB NRf TRIGGER ACTION IMAG DRIVE SD TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH Queries the path on the storage medium where screen captures are saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH gt Function Syntax Example TRIG ACT IMAG PATH Path HD 1 20090506 TRIGger ACTion MAIL TRIGger ACTion IMAGe Function Queries all settings for sending e mail as an Function Queries all settings for saving screen captures as action on trigger an action on trigger Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL Syntax TRIGger ACTion IMAGe 5 122 IM DL850 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt Function Sets or queries the e mail transmission limit for when e mail is sent as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNt NRf 1 to 1000 Example TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT gt TRIGGER ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 TRIGger ACTion MATL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is sent as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE Example TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE ON TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE gt TRIGGER ACTION MAIL MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion MODE Function Sets or queries whether action on trigger is used Syntax TRIGger ACTion MODE Boolean TRIGger ACTion MODE
67. ITEM lt x gt TYPE x 1 to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TYPE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TYPE MAXIMUM 1 10000E 00 1 00000E 00 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the measurement item for the specified waveform parameter Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Current DONTcare lt Current DONTcare gt lt Time DONTcare lt Time DONTcare gt lt Frequency DONTcare lt Frequency DONTcare gt NRf DONTcare gt lt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DELay DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWID th PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of the specified waveform parameter Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 16 GONogo REMote Function Sets or queries the remote mode of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo REMote lt Boolean gt GONogo REMote Example GONOGO REMOTE ON GONOGO REMOTE GONOGO REMOTE 1 GONogo SEQuence Function Sets or queries the action mode of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo SEQuence C
68. MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify MATH1 FFT WINDOW HANNING MATH1 FFT WINDOW gt MATH1 FFT WINDOW HANNING Description The EXPonential parameter is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt Function Queries all digital filter settings Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FILTer lt x gt 1 2 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND Function Sets or queries a digital filter band Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND BPASs HPASs LPASs MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt BAND MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FILTer lt x gt 1 2 MATH1 FILTER1 BAND LPASS MATH1 FILTER1 BAND gt MATH1 FILTER1 BAND LPASS Description You can only specify the GAUSs parameter when the band is set to LPASs This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUTof lt x gt Function Sets or queries a cutoff frequency of a digital filter Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUToff lt x gt NRf MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt CUTOf lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FILTer lt x gt 1 2 CUTo
69. P1X or P2X s NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 PlY or P2Y s NRf 9 9999E425 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 425 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE P1X 1 00000E 00 Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt Function Executes shunt calibration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE UNIT UU CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe Function Sets or queries the measurement range of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe lt NR gt 0 25 0 5 1 2 5 5 10 when the unit is mV or V 500 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 when the unit is pSTR CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE 20000 CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN RANGE 20000 Example 5 46 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed strain module Sy
70. SDEViation Function Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK MAXIMUM gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK MAXIMUM 30 633333E 00 Description This command returns NAN for any statistics that cannot be processed MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter measurement item is ON or OFF Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE ON MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE 1 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue Function Queries the meas
71. Sets or queries the specified parameter s reference condition for history 5 86 CONDition waveform parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the specified parameter s source trace for history waveform 5 86 SOURce parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries for history waveform parameter searches the specified parameter s 5 86 TYPE automatically measured item and upper and lower limits HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Sets or queries the specified parameter s upper and lower limits for history 5 87 TYPE lt Parameter gt waveform parameter searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries the specified parameter s measured value for history waveform 5 87 VALue parameter searches HISTory PARameter LOGic Sets or queries the logic to apply to history waveform searches 5 87 HISTory PARameter TRANge Sets or queries the determination range of history waveform parameter 5 87 searches HISTory RECord Sets or queries the source record 5 87 HISTory RECord MINimum Queries the minimum record number 5 87 HISTory SMODe Sets or queries the history waveform search mode 5 87 HISTory DATE Queries the trigger date of the data at the specified record number 5 87 HISTory TIME Queries the trigger time of the data at the specified record number 5 88 HISTory ZONE Queries all history waveform zone search settings 5 88 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified search zone
72. Sets or queries the start data point in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt WAVeform STARt lt NRf gt 0 to the number of data points 1 WAVEFORM START 0 WAVEFORM START WAVEFORM START 0 Description You can query the total number of data points Example that have been acquired by using the WAVeform LENGth command WAVeform TRACe Function Sets or queries the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to Syntax WAVeform TRACe EVENt MATH lt x gt NRf NRf WAVeform TRACe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s x 1 to 8 EVENt Sends event data WAVEFORM TRACE 1 WAVEFORM TRACE WAVEFORM TRACE 1 Description An error will occur if nothing is installed in the specified channel sub channel Example WAVeform TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position of the record specified by the WAVeform RECord command Syntax WAVeform TRIGger WAVEFORM TRIGGER WAVEFORM TRIGGER 5000 Description Queries the number of points from the beginning of the record to the trigger position Example WAVeform TYPE Function Queries the acquisition mode of the source waveform Syntax WAVeform TYPE Example WAVEFORM TYPE gt WAVEFORM TYPE NORMAL Description This command returns AVERage ENVelope BAVerage or NORMal
73. Sets or queries the waveform label of a channel 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Queries all settings of an installed logic input module 5 43 CHANnel x LOGic BMAPping Sets or queries the bit display method of the specified logic channel 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Queries all settings of each bit of an installed logic input module 5 43 BIT1 BIT8 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries whether the display of each bit is turned on for the specified 5 43 BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay logic channel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries the label of each bit for the specified logic channel 5 43 BIT1 BIT8 LABel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic Sets or queries the chattering elimination for the specified bit of the specified 5 44 BIT1 BIT8 CELimination logic channel CHANnel lt x gt LOGic POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of the specified logic channel 5 44 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can 5 44 perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel x MODUle Queries the module that is installed in the channel 5 44 CHANnel lt x gt STRain Queries all settings of an installed strain module 5 44 CHANnel x STRain BALance Queries whether balancing will be performed on an installed strain module 5 44 CHANnel x1 STRain BALance Sets or queries the channels that balancing will be performed on for an 5 44 CHANnel x2 installed strain module
74. TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 126 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel of condition B TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition B 5 126 TRIGger DELay Sets or queries the delay 5 126 TRIGger EOA Queries all EdgeOnA settings 5 126 TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for 5 127 EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel x Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 127 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 127 CONDition channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 127 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for EdgeOnA triggers TRIGger EOA CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition for EdgeOnA triggers 5 127 TRIGger HOLDoff Queries all hold off settings 5 127 TRIGger HOLDoff TIME Sets or queries the hold off time 5 127 TRIGger MODE Sets or queries the trigger mode 5 127 TRIGger OR Queries all OR trigger settings 5 128 IM DL850 17EN 5 21 spueululo2 5 1 List of Commands
75. TRIGger Group TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s x 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger ATRigger CONDition Function Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CONDition ENTer EXIT FALSe TRUE TRIGger ATRigger CONDition TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION ENTER TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CONDITION ENTER Example Description This command is valid when the trigger type is ABN or ADB TRIGger BGTime Function Queries all B gt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BGTime TRIGger BGTime TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B gt Time triggers Syntax TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER BGTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BGTIME TIME gt TRIGG
76. TY DEGRee Y lt x gt VALue x 1 2 CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description If you have set the waveform that you want to measure to ALL all the measured values from the channels sub channels and Math channels of all the installed modules will be returned NAN will be returned for any unused channels and channels that do not have modules installed in their corresponding slots For modules that have sub channels the measured values of all sub channels will be returned NAN will be returned for any sub channels whose input is turned off CURSor TY HORizontal Function Syntax Queries all horizontal cursor settings for the T Y display CURSor TY HORizontal IM DL850 17EN 5 61 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY HORizontal DY Function Queries all AY axis settings of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal DY CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the horizontal cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe Boolean CURSor TY HORizontal DY STATe CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE ON CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL DY STATE 1 Syntax Example CURSor TY HORizontal DY VALue Function Queries the AY axis value of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display
77. XP 32 bit SP2 or later A separate device driver is required to enable the connection with the PC Data Transfer Rate Switching The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850 DL850V to transmit waveform data Model DL850 DL850V Controller PC Pentium 4 3 2 GHz USB 2 0 ICH6 OS Windows XP Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 1 ms Approx 1 ms Approx 30 ms 10000 Approx 1 ms Approx 2 ms Approx 300 ms 100000 Approx 16 ms Approx 15 ms Approx 3s 1000000 Approx 111 ms Approx 170 ms Approx 30 s between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850 DL850V is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode However this does not work if the DL850 DL850V has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The DL850 DL850V switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC regardless of the local lockou
78. acquired data the data is stored in the output queue until it is read As shown below data is stored in order and read from the oldest message first The output queue is cleared when Anew message is received from the controller Adeadlock occurs see page 4 2 Adevice clear command DCL or SDC is received The DL850 DL850V is turned off and then back on The CLS command does not clear the output queue You can determine whether the output queue is empty by checking bit 4 in the status byte MAV D2 D1 D1 D2 D1 Error Queue When an error occurs the error queue stores the error number and message For example if the DL850 DL850V receives an incorrect program message from the controller the error number 113 and the error message Undefined header are stored in the error queue when the DL850 DL850V displays the error message You can use the STATus ERRor query to read the contents of the error queue Like the output queue the messages in the error queue are read from the oldest one first If the error queue overflows the last message is replaced with the following message 350 Queue overflow The error queue is cleared when A CLS command is received The DL850 DL850V is turned off and then back on You can determine whether the error queue is empty by checking bit 2 in the status byte EAV IM DL850 17EN Appendix Appendix 1
79. analysis sub type 5 75 Type FFT WAVeform x MODE Sets or queries whether an FFT window is displayed 5 75 gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Sets or queries an FFT window s horizontal axis display method 5 75 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Queries all FFT vertical scale settings 5 75 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Sets or queries an FFT window s vertical scale mode 5 75 Vertical Scale Mode FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer Sets or queries the center value of an FFT window s vertical scale 5 75 FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Sets or queries the sensitivity of an FFT window s vertical scale 5 75 SENSitivity FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Sets or queries an FFT window s FFT source channel 5 76 FILE Group FILE Queries all storage media settings 5 77 FILE COPY ABORt Aborts file copying 5 77 FILE COPY CDIRectory Changes the file copy destination directory 5 77 FILE COPY EXECute Executes file copying This is an overlap command 5 77 FILE COPY PATH Queries the file copy destination directory 5 77 FILE DELete Deletes files This is an overlap command 5 77 FILE DIRectory CDIRectory Changes the current directory on the storage medium 5 77 Change Directory FILE DIRectory DRIVe Sets the storage medium to perform file operations on 5 77 FILE DIRectory FREE Queries the free space on the medium that is being operated on in bytes 5 77 FILE DIRectory MDIRectory Creates a directory in the current direct
80. and password in the Ethernet communication interface settings To set the user name and password access the UTILITY menu the Network menu and then the FTP Server screen For details see section 17 3 Accessing the DL850 DL850V from a PC FTP Server in the DL850 DL850V User s Manual IM DL850 02EN IM DL850 17EN 1 3 92ej19ju 39uJ9u13 1 3 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface Connection Procedure Connect a UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair or STP Shielded Twisted Pair cable that is connected to a hub or other network device to the Ethernet port on the DL850 DL850V side panel Hub or router that supports 1000BASE T 100BASE TX Controller PC or work station YOKOGAWA L850 DL850 DL850V UTP or STP cable Network card straight cable Ethernet port RJ 45 modular jack Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes To connect the DL850 DL850V to a PC be sure to use straight cables and to connect through a hub or router Proper operation is not guaranteed for a one to one connection using a cross cable Use a network cable that conforms to the transfer speed of your network Note For details on how to connect the DL850 DL850V to a network see section 17 1 Connecting the DL850 DL850V to a Network in the DL850 DL850V User s Manual IM DL850 02EN IM DL850 17EN 1 4 Configuring the DL850 DL850V Eth
81. channel in which a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed was specified M720210 720210 100M module M720220 16 CH Voltage Input Module M720230 Logic input module M720240 CAN bus monitor module If a 1 channel module or a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed and you specify an even channel for lt x gt this command will return NOMODULE CHANnel lt x gt STRain Function Queries all settings of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain x to 16 CHANnel x STRain BALance Function Queries whether balancing will be performed on an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance Description Returns the status of all installed strain modules CHANnel lt x1 gt STRain BALance CHANnel x2 Function Sets or queries the channels that balancing will be performed on for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x gt lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance CHANnel lt x gt Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 ON CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 CHANNEL11 STRAIN BALANCE CHANNEL12 1 Description The channels you can specify are 1 to 16 for lt x1 x2 gt However you must specify strain module channels CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance EXECute Function Executes strain balancing on an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain BALance EXECute
82. displayed 5 37 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Queries all the settings of an installed frequency module 5 37 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Queries all the input settings of an installed frequency module 5 37 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth Sets or queries the input signal bandwidth limit of an installed frequency 5 37 module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Sets or queries the input signal chattering elimination of an installed 5 37 CELimination frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed frequency module 5 38 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Sets or queries the hysteresis of an installed frequency module 5 38 HYSTeresis CHANnel x FREQ INPut PRESet Sets or queries the preset setting of an installed frequency module 5 38 CHANnel x FREQ INPut PROBe Sets or queries the probe attenuation of an installed frequency module 5 38 CHANnel x FREQ INPut PULLup Sets or queries whether pull up is turned on for an installed frequency 5 38 module CHANnel x FREQ INPut SLOPe Sets or queries the input slope of an installed frequency module 5 38 CHANnel x FREQ INPut Sets or queries the threshold level of an installed frequency module 5 38 THReshold CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut VRANge Sets or queries the voltage range of an installed frequency module 5 38 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Queries all the linear s
83. file copy destination directory Syntax FILE COPY CDIRectory String String Directory name Example FILE COPY CDIRECTORY NO 1 Description String specifies a relative path FILE COPY EXECute Function Executes file copying This is an overlap command Syntax FILE COPY EXECute lt String gt String The file name including its extension Example FILE COPY EXECUTE DATA PNG FILE COPY PATH Function Queries the file copy destination directory Example FILE COPY PATH gt FILE COPY PATH PATH USB UTIL FILE DELete Function Deletes files This is an overlap command Syntax FILE DELete String Example FILE DELETE CASE1 WDF Description Use the FILE DIRectory DRIVe command to select the target medium Use the FILE DIRectory CDIRectory command to select the directory that contains the file that you want to delete Include the extension when you specify the file name f you specify a directory the directory will be deleted FILE DIRectory CDIRectory Change Directory Function Changes the current directory on the storage medium Syntax FILE DIRectory CDIRectory String String Up to 16 characters Example FILE DIRECTORY CDIRECTORY NO 1 FILE DIRectory DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium to perform file operations on Syntax FILE DIRectory DRIVe IFMemory HD lt NR gt NETWork SD USB NRf Example
84. from the internal printer and other devices You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the PRINT MENU key on the front panel HCOPy HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Function Queries all screen capture data output settings Function Sets or queries the network printer output Syntax HCOPy command type Syntax HCOPy NETPrint TYPE EINKjet HCOPy COMMent HINKjet HLASer Function Sets or queries the screen comment HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Syntax HCOPy COMMent lt String gt Example HCOPY NETPRINT TYPE EINKJET HCOPy COMMent HCOPY NETPRINT TYPE HCOPY String Up to 26 characters NETPRINT TYPE EINKJET Example HCOPY COMMENT ABC HCOPY COMMENT gt HCOPY COMMENT ABC o o 3 HCOPy DIRection i Function Sets or queries the data output destination amp Syntax HCOPy DIRection PRINter NETPrinter HCOPy DIRection Example HCOPY DIRECTION FILE HCOPY DIRECTION gt HCOPY DIRECTION FILE HCOPy EXECute Function Executes data output Syntax HCOPy EXECute HCOPy NETPrint Function Queries all network printer output settings Syntax HCOPy NETPrint HCOPy NETPrint TONE Function Sets or queries whether data will be printed in color from the network printer Syntax HCOPy NETPrint TONE Boolean HCOPy NETPrint TONE Example HCOPY NETPRINT TONE ON HCOPY NETPRINT TONE HCOPY NETPRINT TONE 1 IM DL85
85. gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MONITOR ASEND CHAN1 gt See the response format for MONitor ASENd Description Depending on the MONitor VERBose command s setting the measured value is returned with a label and the unit or just the measured value is returned If the specified channel is not displayed OFF is returned for the measured value Example MONitor BITS CHANnel x SCHannelcx Function Queries the effective bit length of the specified channel s data Syntax MONitor BITS CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MONitor BITS CHAN1 gt MONITOR BITS CHAN1 16 Description For example if this command is received by a 701250 voltage module effective bit length of 12 bits 12 is be returned A logic module returns 8 Example MONitor BYTeorder Function Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes or longer Syntax MONitor BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst MONitor BYTeorder MONITOR BYTEORDER MSBFIRST MONITOR BYTEORDER MONITOR BYTEORDER MSBFIRST Example MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sets or queries the transmission data format Syntax MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BYTE WORD MONitor FORMat
86. gt ZNUMber Zone Number Function Sets or queries the zone number that displays the specified source waveform of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt ZNUMber lt NRf gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt ZNUMber xl 1 to 4 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER 1 DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER gt DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 ZNUMBER 1 Description Regardless of the number of zones that have been set you can always specify a number from 1 to 16 with this command DISPlay INTENsity Function Queries all intensity settings Syntax DISPlay INTENsity DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARK er Function Sets or queries the intensity of a display item Syntax DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARKer lt NRf gt DISPlay INTENsity CURSor GRID MARKer lt NRf gt 1 to 8 Example DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR 8 DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR gt DISPLAY INTENSITY CURSOR 8 DISPlay INTerpolate Function Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method Syntax DISPlay INTerpolate LINE OFF PULSe SINE DISPlay INTerpolate DISPLAY INTERPOLATE LINE DISPLAY INTERPOLATE DISPLAY INTERPOLATE LINE Example DISPlay SDGRoup Select Display Group Function Sets or queries the number of the display group that is displayed Syntax DISPlay SDGRoup lt NRf gt DISP
87. is in progress REN Remote Enable Switches between remote and local modes IDY Identify is not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Address commands GTL Go To Local Switches to local mode SDC Selected Device Clear Clears the program message command being received and the output queue see page 6 6 Discards OPC and OPC commands that are being executed e Immediately aborts WAI and COMMunicate WAIT PPC Parallel Poll Configure GET Group Execute Trigger and TCT Take Control are not supported Responses to Multi Line Messages Universal commands LLO Local Lockout Disables the CLEAR TRACE key on the front panel to prohibit switching to the local mode DCL Device Clear Performs the same operation as SDC SPE Serial Poll Enable Sets the talker function on all devices on the bus to serial polling mode The controller will poll each device in order SPD Serial Poll Disable Clears the talker function s serial poll mode on all devices on the bus PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure is not supported What Are Interface Messages Interface messages are commands that a controller transmits They are also referred to as interface commands or bus commands They are classified as follows Uni line Messages Uni line messages are sent over a single control line The following three terminators are available IFC Interface Clear REN Remote Enable IDY Identify IM
88. is returned as block data IMAGe TONE Function Sets or queries the color tone of the screen capture data that will be saved Description IMAGe TONE COLor GRAY OFF REVerse IMAGe TONE Example IMAGE TONE REVERSE IMAGE TONE gt IMAGE TONE REVERSE IM DL850 17EN 5 89 5 18 INITialize Group The commands in this group deal with initializing the DL850 DL850V settings You can perform the same operations that you can by pressing the SETUP key on the front panel and then the Initialize soft key INITialize EXECute Function Initializes the settings This is an overlap command Syntax INITialize EXECute Description The following settings cannot be reset Date and time settings Communication settings The language setting English or Japanese Environment settings An error will occur if the DL850 DL850V receives this command while hard disk recording is being performed When you want to execute this command stop hard disk recording History data is cleared INITialize UNDO Function Undoes the setting initialization Syntax INITialize UNDO Description The cleared history data will not be restored 5 90 IM DL850 17EN 5 19 LSTart Group The commands in this group deal with starting the log operation These commands set the trigger mode to On Start and start waveform acquisition LSTart Log STart Function Starts waveform acquisition immediately Syntax LSTart
89. it is also stopped IM DL850 17EN 5 115 puewwoy 5 31 STORe Group The commands in this group deal with saving setup data You can perform the same operations that you can by pressing the SETUP key on the front panel the Setup Data Store Recall soft key and then the Store Exec soft key STORe Function Queries all the information related to setup data in the internal memory Syntax STORe STORe SETup lt x gt Function Queries information about the setup data in the specified location of the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 3 STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment for the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent lt String gt STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent x 1 to 3 String Up to 14 characters Example STORE SETUP1 COMMENT ABCD STORE SETUP1 COMMENT gt STORE SETUP1 COMMENT ABCD STORe SETup lt x gt DATE Function Queries the date and time of the setup data that is stored to the specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt DATE x 1 to 3 Example STORE SETUP1 DATE gt STORE SETUPI DATE 2010 03 11 09 44 02 Description This command returns No Valid Data if no setup data is stored in the specified location STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute Function Saves setup data to the
90. lt NRf gt can be omitted If you specify lt NRf gt waveform data is queried lt NRf gt times in order starting from the record located at the record number specified by WAVeform CAPTure RECord lt NRf gt An error will occur if the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event IM DL850 17EN 5 133 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform CAPTure SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the capture waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform CAPTure SRATe WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE 1000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE WAVEFORM CAPTURE SRATE 1 0000000E 03 Description This command returns the sample rate of measured data Example An error will occur if the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event WAVeform CAPTure STARt Function Sets or queries the start point to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure STARt lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure STARt lt NRf gt 0 to the number of acquired points in the captured waveform 1 WAVEFORM CAPTURE START 0 WAVEFORM CAPTURE START WAVEFORM CAPTURE START 0 Example WAVeform CAPTure TRIGger Function Queries the trigger position represented as a number of points in the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure TRIGger Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER 5000 WAVeform DATaselect Function Queri
91. lt Parameter gt Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a 5 102 COUNt waveform parameter MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt M Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter 5 102 AXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter 5 102 e STATe measurement item is ON or OFF 3 MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter 5 102 3 VALue a MEASure CYCLe Queries all cycle statistics settings 5 102 o MEASure CYCLe ABORt Aborts cyclic statistical processing 5 102 MEASure CYCLe EXECute Executes cyclic statistical processing 5 102 MEASure CYCLe TRACe Sets or queries the cycle trace of cycle statistics 5 103 MEASure HISTory ABORt Aborts the statistical processing of history waveforms 5 103 MEASure HISTory EXECute Executes the statistical processing of history waveforms 5 103 MEASure MODE Sets or queries the measure mode 5 103 MEASure ONECycle Sets or queries whether one cycle mode is ON or OFF 5 103 MEASure TRANge Time Range Sets or queries the waveform parameter measurement range 5 103 MEASure WAIT Waits for the completion of measurement by using a timeout valuer 5 103 MONitor Group MONitor ASENd Sends the nu
92. mark at the end of a header indicates that it is a query You cannot omit the question mark Example The shortest abbreviation for CURSor is CURS If the x value at the end of a mnemonic is omitted it is interpreted as a 1 Example If you write CHAN for CHANnel lt x gt CHANnell is specified Parts of commands and parameters enclosed in square brackets can be omitted Example TRIGger SIMPle LEVel can be written as TRIG LEV However the last section enclosed in brackets cannot be omitted in an upper level query Example TRIGger and TRIGger SIMPle are different queries 4 4 IM DL850 17EN 4 3 Response Response When the controller sends a query with a question mark the DL850 DL850V returns a response message to the query The DL850 DL850V returns response messages in one of the following two forms Response Consisting of a Header and Data Responses that can be used as program messages without any changes are returned with command headers attached Example ACQUire MODE PMT gt ACQUire MODE NORMAL lt RMT gt Response Only Consisting of Data Responses that cannot be used as program messages unless changes are made query only commands are returned without headers However there are query only commands whose responses the DL850 DL850V will attach headers to Example MEASure CHANnell PTOPeak VALue PMT gt 10 0E 00 lt RMT gt If You Want the DL850
93. ms Approx 510 ms 100000 Approx 170 ms Approx 310 ms Approx 5s 1000000 Approx 1600 ms Approx 3100 ms Approx 50 s IM DL850 17EN 3 5 jieuondo e ejie3u gr d9 B 3 5 Configuring the DL850 DL850V GP IB Settings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the DL850 DL850V remotely through a GP IB interface Communication interface GP IB address UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl z 4 Device r Set Device to GPIB Address Fi 7 Set the address 0 30 l Note Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850 DL850V will not execute the commands properly When the controller is communicating with the DL850 DL850V or with other devices through GP IB do not change the address Each device that is connected by GP IB has its own unique address in the GP IB system This address is used to distinguish one device from other devices Therefore you must assign a unique address to the DL850 DL850V when connecting it to a PC or other device 3 6 IM DL850 17EN 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Interface Messages Responses to Uni Line Messages FC Interface Clear Clears the talker and listener functions Stops data transmission if it
94. on the T Y display 5 63 POSition CURSor TY MARKer M x TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 63 marker cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Queries all X axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 63 e CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y 5 63 3 STATe display is displayed 3 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 63 a VALue v CURSor TY MARKer M x Y Queries all Y axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y 5 64 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display 5 64 VALue CURSor TY MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY TYPE Sets or queries the cursor type on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY VERTical Queries all V cursor settings for the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY VERTical DX Queries all AX value settings AX is between the V cursors on the T Y 5 64 display CURSor TY VERTical DX STATe Sets or queries whether the AX value between the V cursors on the T Y 5 64 display is displayed CURSor TY VERTical DX VALue Queries the AX value
95. parameter determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt CAUSe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 CAUSE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 CAUSE 1 Description When the parameter is the cause of a NO GO result the DL850 DL850V returns 1 Otherwise the DL850 DL850V returns 0 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s reference condition for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM x MODE OFF IN OUT GONogo PARameter x to 16 Example GONOGO PARAMETER GONOGO PARAMETER GONOGO PARAMETER E J EM lt x gt MODE El J EMI MODE IN EMI MODE gt EMI MODE IN E j E J 5 82 IM DL850 17EN 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s source waveform for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe NRf GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TRACe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Channel number Example GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE 1 GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE gt GONOGO PARAMETER ITEM1 TRACE 1 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE Function Queries for parameter determination the specified waveform parameter s measurement item and upper and lower limits Syntax GONogo PARameter
96. queries the input coupling setting of an installed acceleration voltage module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPling AC DC ACCL GND CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPling lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING ACCL CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING gt CHANNEL1 ACCL COUPLING ACCL CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN Function Sets or queries the gain when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRES 0 1 0 2 0 5 4 2 5 10 20 50 100 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL GAIN 1 0 HANNEL1 ACCL GAIN gt HANNEL1 ACCL GAIN 1 0 Q Q CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNEL1 ACCL POSITION 0 00 HANNEL1 ACCL POSITION gt HANNEL1 ACCL POSITION 0 00 Q Q CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe lt x gt 1 to 1
97. s lt x gt 1 to 8 The order is lt Proximal gt lt Mesial gt lt Distal gt Selectable range of the MEAS CHAN lt x gt DPR UNIT command For lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt the selectable range is tthe measurement range and the resolution is the same as the resolution of the zoom method DIV SPAN that has been set by the V Scale of the vertical axis For Math channels 5 div Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT 10 0 10 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL UNIT 10 0000E 00 0 00000E 00 10 0000E 00 Description You cannot set the distal mesial and proximal points using units on frequency modules Depending on the settings that were in use before you sent this command the values may not be set according to the parameters MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod Function Sets or queries the modes of a set of high and low points rising time and falling time measurement references Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod AUTO MAXMin MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt METHod Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD AUTO MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 METHOD AUTO MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt Function Queries the setting of a waveform parameter measureme
98. tel nese EX message language a MULT moving average order frequency sssssse 5 41 N Page MO 9O COUN vetoes EE 5 82 O Page offset 16CH voltage nonet ceteris 5 52 5 54 offset analog voltage 5 49 5 50 Offset giiss zn 5 40 offset monitor trie a idiot xa tee D HE 5 104 one cycle mode 5 103 output queue 6 6 over limit reset frequency eseessesesss 5 42 overlap commands enit ptores e Dc rp dia dene 4 8 P Page P1X P2X 16CH voltage 2 atero cri reete ena 5 53 P1X P2X analog voltage 5 49 PAXI P2X frGqUency 2 i comte cie tnit rater 5 39 PAXI P2X Straii reos irte cert ra enters 5 46 pen marker T phase shift external CloCK tetro phase shift internal clock preset frequency eet ete ra cenis probe analog voltage probe attenuation frequency y program MESSAGE onini e cries PROXIMAL fetes reels arse pull up frequency pulse frequency pulse rotate nes pulse averaging frequency sssssesssss pulse count reset frequency pulses per rotation frequenoy ssssssssss 5 42 uo E M aS record length rois erede tene deter ros o tnter te o RE pei ENTE reference condition history ssesssss reference condition parameter E ref
99. than 10 div only the queried portion of the data is sent When the output format is PP the output start and end points are disabled The output format for logic and event waveforms is shown below When Data Transmitted in BYTE Format Bit 8 Bit 1 Bit 8 Bit 1 t t t Start point First data after End point data data the start point When Data Transmitted in WORD LSBF Format to 04 t Start point First data after data the start point When Data Transmitted in WORD MSBF Format ere me ofere t t t Start point First data after End point data data the start point End point data Event Waveform Bit Assignments s rrejsjajs z t Bit 1 Dual capture event Bit 2 Manual event Bits 3 to 8 Reserved IM DL850 17EN 5 135 pueululo 2 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform SIGN Function Queries whether signs are included in the block data of the source waveform data specified by WAVeform TRACe when the data is queried Syntax WAVeform SIGN Example WAVEFORM SIGN gt WAVEFORM SIGN 1 Description This command returns 0 if the source waveform is a logic waveform and 1 otherwise WAVeform SRATe Sample RATE Function Queries the sample rate of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform SRATe WAVEFORM SRATE WAVEFORM SRATE 500 0E 03 Description This command returns the sample rate of Example measured data WAVeform STARt Function
100. that corresponds to the specified channel You cannot use this command or menu operations to change the setting while measurements are being performed IM DL850 17EN 5 51 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert Function Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt INVert CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue xl 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 lt NRf g
101. the CH1 display CHANnell DISPlay ON String data User defined string Example Comment attached to screen data output HCOPy COMMent ABCDEF Filename Indicates a file name Example Save file name FILE SAVE WAVeform NAME CASE1 Block data Data that contains 8 bit values Example Response to acquired waveform data 800000010ABCDEFGHIJ Decimal Decimal indicates a value expressed as a decimal number as shown in the table below Decimal values are written in the NR form as specified in ANSI X3 42 1975 Symbol Description Examples lt NR1 gt Integer 125 1 1000 lt NR2 gt Fixed point number 125 0 5 90 001 lt NR3 gt Floating point number 125 0E 0 9E 1 1E4 lt NRf gt Any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt The DL850 DL850V can receive decimal values that are sent from the controller in any form from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt This is expressed as NRf The DL850 DL850V returns a response to the controller in one of the forms from lt NR1 gt to lt NR3 gt depending on the query The same form is used regardless of the size of the value For the lt NR3 gt form the plus sign after the E can be omitted You cannot omit the minus sign Ifa value outside the setting range is entered the value is adjusted to the closest value within the range Ifa value has more significant digits than are available the value wil
102. the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY TYPE Sets or queries the cursor type on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY VERTical Queries all V cursor settings for the X Y display 5 68 CURSOr XY VERTical DX Queries all AX axis settings AX is between the V cursors on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe Sets or queries whether the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y 5 68 display is displayed CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue Queries the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY VERTical POSition lt x gt Sets or queries a V cursor position on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY VERTical TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V 5 68 cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY VERTical X x Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the X Y display is 5 68 displayed CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt VALue Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the X Y display 5 68 CURSor WAIT While the DL850 DL850V is waiting for the specified CURSor command to 5 69 finish it will wait the time specified by the CURSor WAIT timeout value until it begins processing the subsequent command DISPlay Group IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Comm
103. the cycle that was measured last will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured lt NRf gt times after the measurement shown on the screen s left edge will be queried When you execute a normal measurement without cyclic statistical processing even if you include lt NRf gt in the command you cannot query the waveform parameters in the history memory pueululo MEASure XY lt x gt Function Queries all the settings for automated measurement of XY waveform parameters Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt Function Queries all the settings of a waveform parameter measurement item Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt XY lt x gt s x 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt XYlInteg XY2Integ IM DL850 17EN 5 101 5 24 MEASure Group MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt Function Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY x Parameter COUNt Parameter XYlInteg XY2Integ Example MEASURE XYl1 XYlINTEG COUNT gt MEASURE XY1 XYlINTEG COUNT 1 MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Queries a cyclic statistical processing value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation lt Par
104. value in 100 ms steps wait without starting 5 112 IM DL850 17EN 5 28 STARt Group The command in this group is used to start waveform acquisition You can execute the same operation that you can by using the START STOP key on the front panel STARt Function Starts waveform acquisition Syntax STRTC Example START IM DL850 17EN 5 113 puewwoy 5 29 STATus Group The commands in this group are used to make settings and queries related to the status report There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group For information about status reports see chapter 6 STATus Function Queries all the settings for the communication status feature Syntax STATus STATus CONDition Function Queries the contents of the condition register Syntax STATus CONDition Example STATUS CONDITION gt 16 Description For details on how to use the STATus CONDition command to synchronize the DL850 DL850V see page 4 9 STATus EESE Function Sets or queries the extended event enable register Syntax STATus EESE lt Register gt STATus EESE lt Register gt 0 to 65535 STATUS EESE B00000000 STATUS EESE gt STATUS EESE 0 Example STATus EESR Function Queries the contents of the extended event register and clears the register Syntax STATus EESR Example STATUS EESR gt 0 STATus ERRor Function Queries the error code and m
105. whether a screen capture is printed from the built in printer 5 80 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe Queries all settings for the screen capture that is saved when the condition is 5 80 met GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved when the condition is met 5 80 GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Sets the current directory where the screen capture is saved to when the 5 80 condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Sets or queries the medium that the screen capture is saved to when the 5 81 condition is met GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that a screen capture is saved to 5 81 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion MAIL Queries all settings for sending e mail when the condition is met 5 81 GONogo ACTion MAIL COUNt Sets or queries the number of times that e mail is sent when the condition is 5 81 met GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is sent when the condition is met 5 81 GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether waveforms are saved to the storage medium when 5 81 the condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Sets the current directory on the storage medium where waveform data is 5 81 saved to when the condition is met spuewwog GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the co
106. with the screen display You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using keys such as the DISPLAY and UTILITY keys on the front panel DISPlay Function Queries all display settings Syntax DISPlay DISPlay ACCumulate Function Queries all accumulated waveform display settings Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate DISPlay ACCumulate MODE Function Sets or queries the accumulated waveform mode Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate MODE OFF ON DISPlay ACCumulate MODE Example DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE ON DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE gt DISPLAY ACCUMULATE MODE 1 DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence Function Sets or queries the number of times that waveforms are accumulated Syntax DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence lt NRf gt INFinity DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE 128 DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE DISPLAY ACCUMULATE PERSISTENCE 128 DISPlay CINFormation Channel Information Function Sets or queries the contents of the channel information display Syntax DISPlay CINFormation FULL NARROow WIDE WWSCale DISPlay CINFormation Example DISPLAY CINFORMATION NARROW DISPLAY CINFORMATION DISPLAY CINFORMATION NARROW DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor Function Sets or queries a waveform color Syntax For channels that do not have sub channels or for math channels DISPla
107. x gt 1 to 4 NRf 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 POSITION gt CURSOR XY MARKER M POSITION 3 000000000000 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T Function Queries all time value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe Function Sets or queries whether the time value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE ON CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T STATE 1 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T VALue Function Queries the time value of a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T VALue x 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T VALUE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 T VALUE 3 0000000E 03 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the marker cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe OFF XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 XY6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY MARKer M x TRACe lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR XY MARKER M1 TRACE XY1 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 TRACE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M
108. x gt Queries the Y axis value of an H cursor on the X Y display 5 66 VALue CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Queries all marker cursor settings for the X Y display 5 66 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition Sets or queries a marker cursor s time axis equivalent position on the X Y 5 67 display CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T Queries all time value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt T STATe Sets or queries whether the time value for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 is displayed CURSor XY MARKer M x T VALue Queries the time value of a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 67 marker cursors on the X Y display CURSor XY MARKer M x X Queries all X axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y 5 67 display is displayed CURSor XY MARKer M x X VALue Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display 5 67 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y 5 67 display is displayed CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on
109. x gt DF lt y gt Queries the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors 5 58 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries all AY display settings AY is between the FFT cursors marker 5 58 cursors CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AY value between the FFT cursors marker 5 58 STATe cursors is displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors 5 58 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Sets or queries the position of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 58 POSition CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 59 FFT cursor marker cursor CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F STATe Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker 5 59 cursor is displayed IM DL850 17EN 5 7 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt F Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 59 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis settings of an F
110. 0 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 OPC lt PMT gt Read the response to OPC CHANnel1 VDIV lt PMT gt The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command Because OPC does not generate a response until the overlapping operation is completed the file loading will have been completed by the time the response to OPC is read Note Most commands are sequential commands Overlap commands are indicated as such in chapter 5 All other commands are sequential commands Achieving Synchronization without Using Overlap Commands Even with sequential commands synchronization with non communication events such as triggers is sometimes required to correctly query the measured data For example if the following program message is transmitted to query waveform data acquired with the trigger mode set to single the WAVeform SEND command may be executed regardless of whether the acquisition has been completed and may result in a command execution error TRIGger MODE SINGle STARt WAVeform S END lt PMT gt If this happens you must use the following method to synchronize to the end of waveform acquisition Using the STATus CONDition query STATus CONDition is used to query the contents of the condition register see page 6 5 You can determine whether waveform acquisition is in progress by reading bit
111. 0 17EN 5 85 5 16 HISTory Group The commands in this group deal with loading data from history waveforms You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the HISTORY key on the front panel HISTory Function Queries all of the settings for the history feature Syntax HISTory HISTory ABORt Function Aborts the history search Syntax HISTory ABORt Example HISTORY ABORT HISTory CLEar Function Clears the data of all history waveforms Syntax HISTory CLEar Example HISTORY CLEAR HISTory DISPlay Function Sets or queries the history start and end numbers that will be displayed Syntax HISTory DISPlay NRf NRf HISTory DISPlay lt NR gt 0 to 4999 HISTORY DISPLAY 1 2 HISTORY DISPLAY HISTORY DISPLAY 1 2 Description The settable values vary depending on the Example memory model and the acquisition conditions HISTory DMODe Display MODE Function Sets or queries the history waveform display mode Syntax HISTory DMODe ONE ALL AVE HISTory DMODe Example HISTORY DMODE ONE HISTORY DMODE HISTORY DMODE ONE HISTory EXECute Function Executes the history waveform search This is an overlap command Syntax HISTory EXECute HISTory PARameter Function Queries all history waveform parameter search settings Syntax HISTory PARameter HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all
112. 1 0 0 0 0 Description The initial value is the reference time of the waveform that is displayed when you open the menu If there are no history waveforms or if the menu is not open the initial value is 00 00 00 00 on January 1 2010 SEARch TWINdow Target WINdow Function Sets or queries the window that search results will be displayed in Syntax SEARch TWINdow 21 22 SEARch TWINdow Example SEARCH TWINDOW Z1 SEARCH TWINDOW SEARCH TWINDOW Z1 SEARCh TYPE Function Sets or queries the search type Syntax SEARCh TYPE EDGE EVENt LSTate MMAX TIME SEARCh TYPE Example SEARCH TYPE EDGE SEARCH TYPE gt SEARCH TYPE EDGE SEARch MAG lt x gt Function Sets or queries a zoom waveform magnification Syntax SEARCh MAG x lt NRf gt SEARch MAG lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 1 to 200000000 Example SEARCH MAG1 1000 SEARCH MAG1 gt SEARCH MAG1 1000 0 Description This command is valid when the DL850 DL850V is using an external clock When the DL850 DL850V is using the internal clock use the SEARch TDIV lt x gt command to set the magnification SEARCh POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the position of a zoom box Syntax SEARch POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt SEARch POSition lt x gt x 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example SEARCH POSITION1 0 7219 SEARCH POSITION1 gt SEARCH POSITION1 0 721900000000 SEARch TDIV lt x gt
113. 1 EXPONENTIAL DRATE gt MATHIl EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the exponential window s FORCe1 or FORCe2 value Syntax MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt EXPonential FORCe lt x gt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FORCe lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 1 to 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 gt MATH1 EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 Example option MATH lt x gt FFT Function Queries all FFT computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify MATH lt x gt FFT POINt Function Sets or queries the number of FFT points Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT POINt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt FFT POINt MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify NRf 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000 Example MATHI FFT POINT 1000 MATHI1 FFT POINT gt MATH1 FFT POINT 1000 MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow Function Sets or queries the time window for FFT computations Syntax MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow HANNing RECTangle FLATtop EXPonential HAMMing MATH lt x gt FFT WINDow
114. 1 TRACE XY1 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X Function Queries all X axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY RKer M lt x gt X STATe lt x gt 1 to Example CURSOR XY CURSOR XY CURSOR XY RKER M1 X STATE 1 RKER M1 X STATE gt RKER M1 X STATE 1 S55 8 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue x 1 to 4 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X VALUE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 X VALUE 333 33333E 03 puewwoy Example CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis value settings for a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY RKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 to Example CURSOR XY CURSOR XY CURSOR XY RKER M1 Y STATE ON RKER M1 Y STATE gt RK
115. 129 TRIGger SIMPle LEVel Sets or queries the trigger level of the channel specified by TRIGger SIMPle 5 129 SOURce for simple triggers TRIGger SIMPle LOGic Queries all simple trigger logic trigger settings 5 129 TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT Sets or queries the bit that sets the trigger slope 5 129 TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe Sets or queries the slope for logic triggers 5 129 TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe Sets or queries the trigger slope of the channel specified by TRIGger 5 129 SIMPle SOURce for simple triggers TRIGger SIMPle SOURce Sets or queries the source for simple triggers 5 129 TRIGger SOURce Queries all the settings of the trigger source for enhanced triggers 5 129 TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Queries all the settings of the specified channel s trigger source for enhanced 5 130 SCHannel lt x gt triggers TRIGger SOURce CHANne1 lt x gt Sets or queries the window trigger center for enhanced triggers 5 130 SCHannel lt x gt CENTer TRIGger SOURce CHANne1 lt x gt Sets or queries the specified channel s hysteresis for enhanced triggers 5 130 SCHannel lt x gt HYSTeresis TRIGger SOURce CHANnelcx Sets or queries the specified channel s level for enhanced triggers 5 130 SCHannel lt x gt LEVel TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the window trigger width for enhanced triggers 5 130 SCHannel lt x gt WIDTh TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the width for wave windo
116. 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 30 000E 30 to 30 000E 30 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE AUTO CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SCALE AUTO Example Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned SIGNed or FLOat CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRE gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 steps Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 POSITION 1 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 POSITION gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELI POSITION 1 00 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit of data of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 8 characters CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT AAAA CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 UNIT AAAA Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned SIGNed or FLOat Example
117. 3 TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as 5 123 an action TRIGger ADB A Delay B Queries all A Delay B trigger settings 5 123 TRIGger ADB DELay Sets or queries the delay time for condition B for A Delay B triggers 5 123 TRIGger AND Queries all AND trigger settings 5 123 TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for 5 124 AND triggers TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 124 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel for AND triggers TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 124 CONDition channel for AND triggers TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 124 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel for AND triggers TRIGger ATRigger Queries all condition A settings 5 124 TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of 5 124 BIT lt x gt condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 124 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specif
118. 5 41 CHANnel x FREQ SETup LRESet Sets or queries whether over limit reset is turned on for an installed 5 42 frequency module CHANnel x FREQ SETup MPULse Sets or queries whether the measurement pulse is positive or negative for an 5 42 installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate Sets or queries the number of pulses per rotation of an installed frequency 5 42 module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Resets the pulse count of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Sets or queries whether stop prediction is turned on for an installed 5 42 STOPpredict frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit Sets or queries the time unit when measuring velocity of an installed 5 42 frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UNIT Sets or queries the pulse integration unit of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UPULse Sets or queries the unit pulse setting of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup VUNit Sets or queries the velocity unit of an installed frequency module 5 42 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV Sets or queries the Value Div setting of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed frequency module 5 43 CHANnel lt x gt LABel
119. 50 DL850V User s Manual For settings other than MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt 10 to 10 div or equivalent values For MATH lt x gt NRf 5 to 5 div in 0 01 div steps MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 1 0 MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD gt MATH1 BINARY CHANNEL1 THRESHOLD 1 000000E 00 0 000000E 00 Example MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt Function Sets or queries a constant for user defined computation Syntax MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 CONStant lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 9 9999E4 30 to 9 9999E430 MATH1 CONSTANT1 1 MATH1 CONSTANT1 gt MATH1 CONSTANT1 1 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example MATH lt x gt DEFine Function Sets or queries an expression for user defined computation Syntax MATH x DEFine String MATH lt x gt DEFine MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt String gt Up to 80 characters Example MATH1 DEFINE PS C1 MATH1 DEFINE gt MATHIl DEFINE PS C1 Description If OPERation is set to a value other than USERdefine this query will return the OPERation setting This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether computations will be performed Syntax MATH lt x gt DISPlay lt Boolean gt MATH lt x gt DISPlay MATH lt x
120. 6 lt NRf gt 1000000 to 1000000 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE 5000 00 5000 00 CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE CHANNEL1 ACCL SCALE 5000 00 5000 00 5 32 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity Function Sets or queries the sensitivity when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 to 2000 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY 1 00 CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY gt CHANNEL1 ACCL SENSITIVITY 1 00 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit string when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT String CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT m s2 CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT gt CHANNEL1 ACCL UNIT m s2 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable Function Sets or queries the scale setup mode when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable Boolean CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable x to 16 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE 0 CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE gt CHANNEL1 ACCL VARIABLE 0 CHANnel lt x gt AC
121. 850 17EN 5 97 puewwoy 5 24 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay COUNt Function Queries the statistics count of the delay between channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH x DELay COUNt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY COUNT 3 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation Function Queries a statistic of the delay between channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MAXimum MEAN MINimum SDEViation CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEAN gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY EAN 6 6666667E 06 Example s MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure Function Queries all the settings for a source waveform for measuring the delay between channels of a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of source waveforms at which delay between channels will be measured for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt
122. 9 e mail transmission GO NO GO esses 5 81 e mail transmission trigger 5 122 edge polarity search teet te nea 5 108 error messages urerge ur T adeno acai Ethernet interface nino m ntm eee exponential averaging attenuation constant extended event register F Page FFT cursor marker cursor 5 58 FFT cursor peak CUrsor x eee e Re 5 59 EFT poinits MATH ir i eniro 5 94 fl COpyiN g eer ieee dense races 5 77 file deletion se 5 77 Menam esene a Q 4 7 file name hard disk recording isesi sarisin 5 26 TING SAVING 5 iir coe eer retur filter frequency filter MATH x MESUAR fiter DANG seus citi e ri cr ES filter type TOM SIZC format Captute i iecore eere EE coca format MONO jcc eee Meta format System y tereti ie tre taie Rr sce format waveform ne TOPMALA ZOOM e urze sa P front palniel ect ero rte IM DL850 17EN Index 1 Index G Page gaim acceleration nuce ei rir cre rere retos retenus 5 32 fe VIR 046 a1 0 D eere 5 104 gauge factor strain es 5 45 ex BOA bu 3 2 GP IB interface 3 4 3 5 QNOUPS E 4 3 GTL G TO Eoc l 5 iei scr en beret 3 7 H Page hard diskrecording torre 5 25 5 26 H cursor X Y HGIG Off Wess oec casos o eter dere Cete det e horizontal cursor THY icons ca acce tome erect
123. 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype MODE x to 16 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLA
124. A 74 5A 90 6A 106 7A 122 B 3 33 53 11 73 27 113 11 133 27 153 11 173 27 VT ESC K iki B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 4B 75 5B 91 6B 107 7B 123 C 4 34 54 12 74 28 114 12 134 28 154 12 174 28 FF FS LIAJ I C 12 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 4C 76 5C 92 6C 108 7C 124 D 5 35 55 13 75 29 115 13 135 29 155 13 175 29 CR GS M m D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 4D 77 5D 93 6D 109 7D 125 E 6 36 56 14 76 30 116 14 136 30 156 14 176 30 SO RS N nij E 14 1E 30 2bE 46 3E 62 4E 78 5E 94 6E 110 7E 126 F 7 37 57 15 77 UNL 117 15 137 UNT 157 15 AE SI US O a O _ ruBouT E 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 4F 79 SF 95 6F 111 7F 127 Address Universal Listener Talker Secondary command command address address command Exam ple Octal GP IB code Hexadecimal ASCII character code Decimal IM DL850 17EN App 1 xipueddy E Appendix 2 Error Messages This section explains communication error messages Messages can be displayed in English or Japanese on the DL850 DL850V However when they are read from a PC or other similar device messages are displayed in English If servicing is necessary to solve the problem indicated by a message contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Only communication error messages are listed here For details on other error messages see the user s manual IM DL850 02bN Communication syntax errors Communication execution errors Device specific and other errors Communication query erro
125. ANnell VDIV 5V VDIV PMT This is because the next command is forced to wait until the processing of CHANnel11 VDIV is completed This type of command is called a sequential command Let us assume you send the next program message when you want to load a file and query the V div value of the result FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASEI CHANnell VDIV In this case CHANnel1 VDIV is executed before the loading of the file is completed and the V div value that is returned is the value before the file is loaded Overlapping refers to the act of executing the next command before the processing of the current command is completed such as in the command FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASEI A command that operates in this way is called an overlap command You can prevent overlapping by using the following methods Synchronizing to Overlap Commands e Using a WAI Command A WAI command holds the subsequent commands until the overlap command is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASEI WAI CHANnell VDIV PMT The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply WAT to Here it is applied to the media access command WAI is executed before CHANnel1 VDIV so CHANnell VDIV is not executed until the file loading is completed Using the COMMunicate OVERlap command The COMMunicate OVERlap comm
126. ARKER M1 DX2 STATE 1 5 62 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor VALue Function Syntax Example CURSor Function Syntax CURSor Function Syntax Example CURSor VALue Function Syntax Example CURSor Function Syntax Example TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Queries the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 VALUE 2 0000000E 03 TY MARKer M x DY Xy Queries all AY value settings AY is between the marker cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt x 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe Sets or queries whether the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 STATE 1 TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Queries the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt VALue x 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE 0 0000000E 00 TY MARKer M lt x gt POSition Sets or q
127. ARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 Example CURSOR FF ER M1 Y STATE ON CURSOR F ER M1 Y STATE gt CURSOR FE ER M1 Y STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M x Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 Y VALUE 46 750000E 00 CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the form of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Example CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM LINE CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM gt CURSOR FFT MARKER FORM LINE CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Oo Function Queries all settings of an FFT cursor peak 3 cursor 3 Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt 3 lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Cursor 1 is dedicated for use as FFT1 Cursor 2 is dedicated for use as FFT2 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F Function Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor
128. B Function Note 7 Set USB Function to TMC Storage Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850 DL850V will not execute the commands properly To remotely control the DL850 DL850V through a USB port using communication commands set USB Function shown in the figure above to TMC and then carry out the following steps To activate the USB Function settings you need to restart the DL850 DL850V Turn off the DL850 DL850V power switch wait ten seconds or more and then turn on the switch Install the YOKOGAWA USB TMC Test and Measurement Class driver on your PC For information about how to obtain the YOKOGAWA USB TMC driver contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer You can also access the YOKOGAWA USB driver download webpage and download the driver http www yokogawa co jp tm F SOFT Do not use USB TMC drivers or software supplied by other companies 2 4 IM DL850 17EN Chapter3 GP IB Interface Optional 3 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850 DL850V keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 3 7 has been activated by a controller YOKOGAWA DL850 COPE COREY
129. CAN SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM 1 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BSNUM 1 5 34 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut Function Syntax Example Sets or queries whether a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module is ON or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT ON CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 INPUT 1 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the message format of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat EXTended STANdard CHANnel x s x 13 to 16 SCHANnel x s x 1 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELI MFORMAT STANDARD CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MFORMAT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNELI MFORMAT STANDARD a CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID Function Syntax Example Description Sets or queries the message ID of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID String CHANnel x s x 13 to 16 SCHANnel x s x 1 to 16 When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN O
130. CHANNEL15 LOGIC BMAPPING AUTO CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 Function Queries all settings of each bit of an installed logic input module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the display of each bit is turned on for the specified logic channel 9 Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 i DISPlay Boolean z CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 DISPlay lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY ON CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY gt CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT1 DISPLAY 1 CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel Function Sets or queries the label of each bit for the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 LABel lt String gt Up to 16 characters lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL ABC HANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL gt HANNEL15 LOGIC BIT8 LABEL ABC Q Q IM DL850 17EN 5 43 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination Function Sets or queries the chattering elimination for the specified bit of the specified logic channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination OFF lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt LOGic BIT1 BIT8 CELimination lt x gt
131. CHANnel x SCHannelcx CHANnel lt x gt s x 1 to 16 SCHannel x s x 1 to 16 sub channel Example MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL SCHANNEL1 WORD MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 gt MONITOR FORMAT CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 WORD MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the offset that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel Example MONITOR OFFSET CHANNEL1 gt MONITOR OFFSET CHANNEL1 0 0000000E 00 MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the gain that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel Example MONITOR GAIN CHANNEL1 5 104 IM DL850 17EN 5 22 MONitor Group MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries the range that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor data is converted to a physical value Syntax MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub chann
132. CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 For the 701265 FULL lt Frequency gt lt Frequency gt 2 8 30 Hz For the 701261 FULL lt Frequency gt Frequency 2 8 30 Hz For the 701262 AUTO FULL XFrequency Frequency 2 8 30 Hz Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BWIDTH FULL CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed module that can measure temperature Syntax For the 701265 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling DC TC GND For the 701261 or 701262 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature COUPling AC DC TC GND lt x gt 1 to 16 HANnel x TEMPerature COUPling HANNEL9 TEMPERATURE COUPLING TC HANNEL9 TEMPERATURE COUPLING gt HANNEL9 TEMPERATURE COUPLING TC Example Cy C AQ OX CHANnel x TEMPerature RJC Function Sets or queries the RJC that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature RJC lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE RJC 1 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE RJC gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE RJC 1 pueululo 2 CHANnel x TEMPerature SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen that are used when temperature measurements are performed S
133. CL ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel x ACCL ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0734 7 0 87 0 833 dz 3 34 3 25 1433 143 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 61 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL ZOOM 1 000 CHANNEL1 ACCL ZOOM gt CHANNEL1 ACCL ZOOM 1 000 CHANnel lt x gt CAN Function Queries all the settings of a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel x CAN x 13 to 16 CHANnel x CAN OSOut Function Queries all the one shot output settings of a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel x CAN 0SOut x 13 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut EXECute One Shot Out Function Executes one shot output on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel x CAN OSOut EXECute lt x gt 13 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT EXECUTE S CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt 3 Function Sets or queries the data frame value used by a A CAN bus monitor module when it performs one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 DATA lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 String 0 to FE Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DATA1 FF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DATA1 CHANNEL13 CAN OSO
134. COMMunicate WAIT command The COMMuni cate WAIT command is used to wait for a specific event to occur Example STATus FILTer1 FALL STATus ESR TRIGger ODE SINGle lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus E ESR COMMunicate WAIT 1 WAVeform SEND lt PMT gt For a descript STATus E ion of STATus FILTerl FALL and ESR see the previous section about the extended event register The COMMuni cate WAIT 1 command specifies that the program will wait for bit O in the extended event register WAVeform SI to be set to 1 END is not executed until bit O in the extended event register becomes 1 IM DL850 17EN 4 9 Chapter 5 Commands 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page ACQuire Group ACQuire Queries all waveform acquisition settings 5 25 ACQuire AVERage Queries all averaging settings 5 25 ACQuire AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform during 5 25 averaging ACQuire AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 25 Exponent Weight ACQuire CLOCk Sets or queries the time base internal or external clock 5 25 ACQuire COUNt Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform in Normal 5 25 mode ACQuire MODE Sets or queries the waveform acquisition mode 5 25 ACQuire PROTate Sets
135. CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe x 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 X VALUE 3 0000000E 03 IM DL850 17EN 5 63 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y Function Queries all Y axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M x Y STATe Boolean SCURSOT TY RKer M lt x gt Y STATe lt x gt 1 to Example CURSOR TY CURSOR TY CURSOR TY RKER M4 Y STATE ON RKER M4 Y STATE gt RKER M4 Y STATE 1 S55 8 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe x 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y VALUE gt CURSOR TY MARKER M4 Y VALUE 41 666667E 03 CURSor TY MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor TY MARKer FORM Example CURSOR TY MARKER FORM MARK CURSOR TY MARKER FORM gt CURSOR TY MARKER FORM MARK
136. DE gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MODE 1 Example GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory where the screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory lt String gt GONogo ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory lt String gt Directory name Example GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY CASE1 GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE CDIRECTORY CASE1 5 80 IM DL850 17EN 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Function Sets or queries the medium that the screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB NR GONogo ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Example GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE HD GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE DRIVE HD 0 Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850 DL850V internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium First lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850 DL850V this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Functi
137. DL850 17EN 3 7 jieuondo e eji831u gr d9 B 3 6 Responses to Interface Messages Multi line Messages Multi line messages are sent over eight data lines The messages are grouped as follows Address Commands Some address commands are valid when a device is designated as a listener and some are valid when it is designated as a talker The following five commands are available Commands available to a device designated as a listener GTL Go To Local SDC Selected Device Clear PPC Parallel Poll Configure GET Group Execute Trigger Commands available to a device designated as a talker TCT Take Control Universal Commands Universal commands are available to all devices regardless of their listener or talker designation The following five commands are available LLO Local Lockout DCL Device Clear PPU Parallel Poll Unconfigure SPE Serial Poll Enable SPD Serial Poll Disable There are other interface messages listener address talk address and secondary commands Interface Messages Multi line Messages r Uni line Messages r Address Universal commands commands IFC REN IDY GTL LLO SDC DCL PPC PPU GET SPE TCT SPD Listener Talker Secondary address address command The DL850 DL850V supports interface messages marked with an asterisk Note Difference betw
138. DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder Communication Interface USER S MANUAL YOKOGAWA 4 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850 17EN 2nd Edition Thank you for purchasing the DL850 ScopeCorder or DL850V ScopeCorder Vehicle Edition hereinafter DL850 DL850V will refer to both of these products This Communication Interface User s Manual explains the following interface features and commands Ethernet interface USBinterface GP IB interface optional To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DL850 DL850V Please read all manuals Manual Title Manual No Description DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 01EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual This Features Guide manual explains all the DL850 DL850V features other than the communication interface features DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 02EN The supplied CD contains the PDF file of this manual The User s Manual manual explains how to operate the DL850 DL850V DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 03EN The manual explains the handling precautions and basic Getting Started Guide operations of the DL850 DL850V and provides an overview of its features DL850 DL850V ScopeCorder IM DL850 17EN This manual The supplied CD contains the PDF file of Commu
139. E Function Queries the trigger time of the data at the specified record number Syntax HISTory TIME NRf MINimum lt NR gt 0 to 4999 Example HIST TIME 1 gt HIST TIME 0001 10 20 30 04 Description If you specify a record number that is lower than MINimum this command will return R HISTory ZONE Function Queries all history waveform zone search settings Syntax HISTory ZONE HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified search zone Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the specified search zone s search condition Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition OFF IN OUT HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt CONDition Example HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION IN HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION gt HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 CONDITION IN HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the specified search zone s source waveform Syntax HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce lt NRf gt HISTory ZONE EDIT lt x gt SOURce lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE 1 HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE gt HISTORY ZONE EDIT1 SOURCE 1 HISTory ZONE LOGic Function Sets or queries the logic condition of history waveform zone searches Syntax HISTory ZONE LOGic AND OR
140. EL1 ALL ON MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 ALL ON Description For channels that have sub channels use the MEAS CHAN SCH ALL command lt x gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination CopyDestination Function Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is ON or OFF for when parameter measurement items are copied between channels Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt CDEStination Boolean MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination lt x gt 1 to 16 lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 EASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION ON EASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION gt EASURE CHANNEL2 CDESTINATION 1 EASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 ESTINATION ON EASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 ESTINATION gt MEASURE CHANNEL7 SCHANNEL1 CDESTINATION 1 Example OUO S U S S S X MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COPY Function Copies all the measurement item ON OFF settings from one specified channel to another specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel x MATH x COPY MEASure CHANnel x SCHannel x COPY x to 16 x 1 to 16 sub channel MATH lt x gt s x 1 to 8 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 COPY MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay Function Queries all delay settings Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay IM DL
141. EQ INPUT CELIMINATION 0 000 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT CELIMINATION CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT CELIMINATION 0 000 IM DL850 17EN 5 37 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling AC DC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut COUPling lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING DC CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT COUPLING DC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1e CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut HYSTeresis lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS LOW CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT HYSTERESIS LOW CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet Function Sets or queries the preset setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel x FREQ INPut PRESet AC100v AC200v EMPickup LOG12v LOG24v LOG3v LOG5v PULLup USER ZERO CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PRESet lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET USER CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PRESET USER CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe Function Sets or queries the probe attenu
142. ER BGTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger BLTime Function Queries all B lt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BLTime TRIGger BLTime TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B lt Time triggers Syntax TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger BGTime TIME lt Time gt 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER BLTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BLTIME TIME gt TRIGGER BLTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger BTOut Function Queries all B TimeOut trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BTOut TRIGger BTOut TIME Function Sets or queries the pulse width for B TimeOut triggers Syntax TRIGger BTOut TIME Time TRIGger BTOut TIME Time 10ns to 10s TRIGGER BTOUT TIME 0 001 TRIGGER BTOUT TIME gt TRIGGER BTOUT TIME 1 00000000E 03 Example pueululo TRIGger BBETween Function Queries all B Between trigger settings Syntax TRIGger BBETween TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt Function Sets or queries a pulse width for B Between triggers Syntax TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt lt Time gt TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt x 1 2 Time 10ns to 10s Example TRIGger BBET TIME1 0 001 GGER BBETWEEN TIME1 gt TRIGGER BBETWEEN TIME1 1 00000000E 03 x TRIGger BTRigger Function Queries all condition B settings Syntax TRIGger BTRigger IM DL850 17EN 5 125 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BI
143. ER M1 Y STATE 1 S58 8 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Y VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a marker cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M x Y VALue x 1 to 4 CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y VALUE gt CURSOR XY MARKER M1 Y VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Example IM DL850 17EN 5 67 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor XY MARKer FORM Function Sets or queries the form of the marker cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer FORM LINE MARK CURSor XY MARKer FORM CURSOR XY MARKER FORM LINE CURSOR XY MARKER FORM gt CURSOR XY MARKER FORM LINE Example Description lt x gt 1 to 4 however the setting is the same for cursors 1 to 4 CURSor XY TYPE Function Sets or queries the cursor type on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY TYPE OFF HORizontal VERTical MARKer HAVertical CURSor XY TYPE Example CURSOR XY TYPE MARKER CURSOR XY TYPE gt CURSOR XY TYPE MARKER CURSor XY VERTical Function Queries all V cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical CURSor XY VERTical DX Function Queries all AX axis settings AX is between the V cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY VERTical DX CURSor XY VERTical DX STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX axis value between the V cursors on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY VERTical DxX STATe lt Boolean gt
144. FT cursor marker cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor is 5 59 displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Y Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 59 VALue CURSor FFT MARKer FORM Sets or queries the form of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Queries all settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F Queries all frequency axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F STATe Sets or queries whether the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak 5 59 cursor is displayed CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt F VALue Queries the frequency axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 59 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y Queries all Y axis settings of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 60 CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor is 5 60 displayed CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue Queries the Y axis value of an FFT cursor peak cursor 5 60 CURSor FFT TYPE Sets or queries the FFT cursor type 5 60 CURSor TY Queries all cursor settings for the T Y display 5 60 CURSor TY DEGRee Queries all angle cursor settings for the T Y display 5 60 CURSor TY DEGRee DXX Queries all angle difference D lt x gt settings for the angle cursors on the T Y 5 60 display
145. Function Sets or queries a zoom waveform T DIV value Syntax SEARch TDIV x Time HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOUR8 HOURS HOUR10 HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 SEARCh TDIV lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt Time gt the same as the T Div setting Example SEARCH TDIV1 0 01 SEARCH TDIV1 SEARCH TDIV1 10 00E 03 Description This command is valid when the DL850 DL850V is using the internal clock When the DL850 DL850V is using an external clock use the SEARch MAG lt x gt command to set the magnification 5 110 IM DL850 17EN 5 26 SNAP Group The command in this group is used to take snapshots You can execute the same operation that you can by using the SNAP SHOT key on the front panel SNAP Function Takes a snapshot Syntax SNAP Example SNAP IM DL850 17EN 5 111 puewwoy 5 27 SSTart Group The commands in this group deal with executing the single start operation These commands set the trigger mode to Single and start waveform acquisition SSTart Function Executes the single start operation Syntax SSTart Example SSTART SSTart lt NRf gt Function Executes the single start operation and waits for its completion by using a timeout valuer Syntax SSTart lt NRf gt Example SSTart 100 Description NR 1 to 36000 timeout value in 100 ms steps start and wait 36000 to 1 timeout
146. GAWA DL850 a CJ CJ amp 3J MADS UTILITY key page 2 4 Press this key to set the communication interface for remote control and to enable remote control through the USB ports when you want to use remote commands Side Panel A EXT IIO USB ports These ports are for connecting the DL850 DL850V to a controller such as a PC using a USB cable For details on AIMBASET how to connect the DL850 DL850V to a controller see page 2 3 IM DL850 17EN 2 1 e eyieju JSN 2 2 USB Interface Features and Specifications USB Interface Features Reception Features Allows you to specify the same settings that you can using the front panel keys Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes Transmission Features The DL850 DL850V can transmit measured and computed data The DL850 DL850V can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850 DL850V can transmit error codes when errors occur USB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications USB 2 0 Connector Type B connector receptacle Number of ports 2 Power supply Self powered System requirements A PC with a USB port running Windows 7 32 bit Windows Vista 32 bit or Windows
147. GO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE IN Syntax Example IM DL850 17EN 5 83 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s determination waveform for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt TRACe NRf GONogo ZONE PATTern cx TRACe x 1 to 16 Example GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE 1 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 TRACE 1 GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s source waveform zone data for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE lt NRf gt GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 5 Example GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE 1 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 ZONE 1 GONogo WAIT Function Waits for the completion of GO NO GO determination by using a timeout value Syntax GONogo WAIT lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 864000 in units of 100 ms Example Setting the timeout value to 5 seconds GONOGO WAIT 50 gt 0 Description The DL850 DL850V returns 0 if the operation finishes before the timer expires and returns 1 if the timer expires 5 84 IM DL850 17EN 5 15 HCOPy Group The commands in this group deal with printing screen captures
148. HANnel x CAN OSOut Queries all the one shot output settings of a CAN bus monitor module 5 33 CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut EXECute Executes one shot output on a CAN bus monitor module 5 33 One Shot Out CHANne1 lt x gt CAN OSOut DATA lt x gt Sets or queries the data frame value used by a CAN bus monitor module 5 33 when it performs one shot output CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC Data Sets or queries the byte size of the data section of the data frame used for 5 33 Length Code one shot output CHANnel x CAN OSOut FRAMe Sets or queries the format data or remote of the frame used for one shot 5 33 output CHANnel x CAN OSOut MFORmat Sets or queries the message format standard or extended of the frame 5 34 Message Format used for one shot output CHANnel x CAN OSOut MID Sets or queries the message ID of the frame used for one shot output 5 34 Message ID CHANnel x CAN PORT Queries all the port settings of a CAN bus monitor module 5 34 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe Sets or queries the bitrate of a CAN bus signal port 5 34 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum Bit Sets or queries the number of sample points for each bit of a CAN bus signal 5 34 sample num port CHANnel x CAN PORT LONLy Sets or queries the Listen Only setting for a CAN bus monitor module port 5 34 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SJW Sync Sets or queries the resynchronizat
149. Hannel lt x gt LABel lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt LABel CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 the upper limit varies depending on the module type lt String gt Up to 16 characters CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth Function Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only puewwoy odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 500Hz Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling DC GND OFF CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt COUPling CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot
150. IMAGe SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering OFF IMAGe SAVE ANAMing Example IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGE SAVE ANAMING IMAGE SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory Function Syntax Example Changes the output destination directory IMAGe SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt String Up to 16 characters IMAGW SAVE CDIRECTORY 20100318 000 IMAGe SAVE DRIVe Function Syntax Example Description IMAGe SAVE FRAMe Function Syntax Example Sets the output destination medium IMAGe SAVE DRIVe IFMemory HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB NRf NRf IMAGe SAVE DRIVe USB 0 See the description of the FILE DIRectory DRIVe command pueululo 2 Sets or queries whether a white frame is attached to the saved screen capture s image IMAGe SAVE FRAMe lt Boolean gt IMAGe SAVE FRAMe IMAGe SAVE FRAMe 1 IMAGe SAVE FRAMe gt IMAGe SAVE FRAMe 1 IMAGe SAVE NAME Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved IMAGe SAVE NAME lt Filename gt IMAGe SAVE NAME IMAGE SAVE NAME ABC IMAGe SAVE NAME gt IMAGe SAVE NAME IMAGe SAVE PATH Function Queries the current directory Example IMAGE SAVE PATH gt IMAGE SAVE PATH Path HD 0 IMAGe SEND Function Queries the screen capture data Syntax IMAGe SEND Description The screen capture data
151. IMPLE SOURCE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE SOURCE 1 Example TRIGger SOURce Function Queries all the settings of the trigger source for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce IM DL850 17EN 5 129 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all the settings of the specified channel s trigger source for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer Function Sets or queries the window trigger center for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer lt Voltage gt lt NRf gt lt Current gt TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CENTer CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CENTER TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CENTER TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CENTER 1 00000E 00 TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the specified channel s hysteresis for enhanced triggers Syntax TRIGger SOURce CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER SOURCE CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI HYSTERESIS HIGH
152. INary SETup SNAP EXECute Function Executes the loading of various types of data This is an overlap command Syntax FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP EXECute lt Filename gt Example FILE LOAD SETUP CASE1 Description Do not include the extension when you specify lt Filename gt FILE SAVE Function Queries all file name settings for saving files Syntax FILE SAVE FILE SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto naming mode for saving files Syntax FILE SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering OFF FILE SAVE ANAMing Example FILE SAVE ANAMING DATE FILE SAVE ANAMING gt FILE SAVE ANAMING DATE Description DATE Date and time NUMBering Numbering OFF The file name that you saved with the FILE SAVE NAME command FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Function Queries all the settings related to the saving of a specific type of file Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP ABORt Function Aborts the saving of a specific type of file Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP ABORC Example FILE SAVE SETUP ABORT FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute Function Executes the saving of a specific type of file This is an overlap command Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute Example FILE SAVE SETUP EXECUTE FILE SAVE A
153. L1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE OFF IM DL850 17EN 5 49 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16 P1X or P2X s NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s NRf 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999R 25 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet Function Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage OFFSet lt Voltage gt lt Current gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet lt
154. MUNICATE HEADER 1 Example COMMunicate LOCKout Function Sets or clears local lockout Syntax COMMunicate LOCKout lt Boolean gt COMMunicate LOCKout COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT gt COMMUNICATE LOCKOUT 1 Example Description This command is designed for use in USB and Ethernet communications COMMunicate OPSE Function Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and WAI commands Syntax COMMunicate OPSE Register COMMunicate OPSE Register 0 to 65535 See the figure in the description of the COMM WAIT command COMMUNICATE OPSE 65535 COMMUNICATE OPSE COMMUNICATE OPSE 584 Description Bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 5 6 8 and 11 Example COMMunicate OPSR Function Queries the operation pending status register Syntax COMMunicate OPSR Example COMMunicate OPSR gt 0 COMMunicate OVERLap Function Sets or queries the commands that operate as overlap commands Syntax COMMunicate OVERlap Register COMMunicate OVERlap Register 0 to 65535 See the figure in the description of the COMM WAIT command Description Bits fixed to 0 are not set to 1 so the response to the query only indicates 1 for bits 5 6 8 and 11 COMMunicate REMote Function Sets or queries whether the DL850 DL850V is in remote or local mode ON is remote mode Syntax
155. NRf gt 0 to 8 Example DISPLAY ESIZE AUTO DISPLAY ESIZE gt DISPLAY ESIZE AUTO DISPlay FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical direction Syntax DISPlay FORMat lt NRf gt DISPlay FORMat NRf 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 Example DISPLAY FORMAT 4 DISPLAY FORMAT gt DISPLAY FORMAT 4 DISPlay GRATicule Function Sets or queries the grid type Syntax DISPlay GRATicule CROSshair FRAMe GRID DISPlay GRATicule Example DISPLAY GRATICULE GRID DISPLAY GRATICULE gt DISPLAY GRATICULE GRID DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt Function Queries all display group settings Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Queries all source waveform settings for a display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the source that is assigned to the specified source waveform of the specified display group Syntax DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce OFF MATH lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt SOURce x1 1 to 4 lt x2 gt 1 to 64 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 sub channel number MATH x s x to 8 Example DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE 1 DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE gt DISPLAY GROUP1 TRACE1 SOURCE 1 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2
156. NRf gt the most recent history parameter value will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the history parameter value of the waveform lt NRf gt times before the newest history waveform will be queried After cyclic statistical processing has been completed lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured last will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the parameter value within the cycle that was measured lt NRf gt times after the measurement shown on the screen s left edge will be queried MEASure CYCLe Function Queries all cycle statistics settings Syntax MEASure CYCLe MEASure CYCLe ABORt Function Aborts cyclic statistical processing Syntax MEASure CYCLe ABORt Example MEASURE CYCLE ABORT MEASure CYCLe EXECute Function Executes cyclic statistical processing Syntax MEASure CYCLe EXECute Example MEASURE CYCLE EXECUTE 5 102 IM DL850 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CYCLe TRACe Function Sets or queries the cycle trace of cycle statistics Syntax MEASure CYCLe TRACe OWN lt NRf gt L NR MATH lt x gt MEASure CYCLe TRACe First lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Second NRf to 16 sub channel MATH lt x gt s x 1 to 8 MEASURE CYCLE TRACE OWN MEASURE CYCLE TRACE gt MEASURE CYCLE TRACE OWN Example MEASure HISTory ABORt Function Aborts the statistical processing of history waveforms Sy
157. O in the condition register If the bit is 1 waveform acquisition is in progress If the bit is 0 waveform acquisition is not in progress Example TRIGger MODE SINGle STARt lt PMT gt STATus CONDition lt PMT gt Read the response If bit 0 is 1 return to the previous command WAVeform SEND lt PMT gt WAVeform SEND is not executed until bit O in the condition register becomes 0 Using the Extended Event Register The changes in the condition register can be reflected in the extended event register see page 6 5 Example STATus FILTerl FALL STATus ESE 1 E ESR SRE 8 TRIGger ODE SINGle STARt lt PMT gt Read the response to STATus E Wait for a service request ESR WAVe form SEND lt PMT gt The STATus transition filter so that bit O in the extended event FILTer1 is set to 1 when bit 0 in the condition register changes from 1 to 0 The STATus E change the status byte based on bit 0 in the extended event register The STATus E extended event register The SRE 8 command is used to generate service FILTerl FALL command sets the ESE 1 command is used to only ESR command is used to clear the M9IAJ9AQ BuruuejBo0Jd gt requests based only on the changes in the extended event register The WAVefor until a service bits m SEND command is not executed request is generated Using the
158. ONTinue SINGle GONogo SEQuence Example GONOGO SEQUENCE CONTINUE GONOGO SEQUENCE GONOGO SEQUENCE CONTINUE GONogo TRANge Function Sets or queries the determination range of GO NO GO determination Syntax GONogo TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt GONogo TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example GONOGO TRANGE 5 5 GONOGO TRANGE GONOGO TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 9 3 GONogo ZONE i Function Queries all waveform zone determination zi settings Syntax GONogo ZONE GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified determination pattern for waveform zone determination Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe Function Queries whether the specified determination pattern for waveform zone determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment Syntax GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt CAUSe x to 16 Example GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 CAUSE gt GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 CAUSE 0 Description When the determination pattern is the cause of a NO GO result the DL850 DL850V returns 1 Otherwise the DL850 DL850V returns 0 GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s reference condition for waveform zone determination GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE IN OUT OFF GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 GONOGO ZONE PATTERN1 MODE IN GONO
159. Pe TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE RISE TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE EXTERNAL SLOPE RISE Example TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDD1le TRIGger SIMPle HYSTeresis TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS HIGH TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS TRIGGER SIMPLE HYSTERESIS HIGH Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME Example TRIGger SIMPle LEVel Function Sets or queries the trigger level of the channel specified by TRIGger SIMPle SOURce for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LEVel lt Voltage gt NRf Current TRIGger SIMPle LEVel TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL 1 TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LEVEL 1 00000E 00 Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME The selectable range is the range that can be measured with the current measurement range setting Example If VDiv is 10 the selectable range is 100 V For strain measurements the selectable range is the current measurement range setting Values do not take linear scaling information into Example consideration The trigger s selectable range of Au7Fe temperatures is 0 to 280 K 273 to 7 C TRIGger SIMPle LOGic Function Queries all simple trig
160. R WWINDOW FREQUENCY 400 TRIGGER WWINDOW FREQUENCY gt TRIGGER WWINDOW FREQUENCY 400 TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle Function Sets or queries the reference cycle for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle lt NRf gt TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle lt NRf gt 1 2 4 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Function Queries all synchronization channel settings for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis Function Sets or queries the hysteresis of the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis HIGH LOW MIDDle TRIGger WWINdow SYNC HYSTeresis Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS MIDDLE GGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS gt GGER WWINDOW SYNC HYSTERESIS MIDDLE Description You cannot set this setting when the synchronization channel is set to AUTO J W j W TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Function Sets or queries the level of the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel lt Voltage gt lt NR gt lt Current gt TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL 2 00000E 00 TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL gt TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC LEVEL 2 00000E 00 Description You cannot set this setting when the synchronization channel is set to AUTO TRIGger
161. RE AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 ACQuire CLOCk Function Sets or queries the time base internal or external clock Syntax ACQuire CLOCk INTernal EXTernal Example ACQUIRE CLOCK INTERNAL ACQUIRE CLOCK gt ACQUIRE CLOCK INTERNAL ACQuire COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform in Normal mode Syntax ACQuire COUNt lt NRf gt INFinity lt NRf gt 1 to 65536 Example ACQUIRE COUNT INFINITY ACQUIRE COUNT gt ACQUIRE COUNT INFINITY ACQuire MODE Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the waveform acquisition mode ACQuire MODE AVERage BAVerage ENVelope NORMa1 ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL ACQUIRE MODE gt ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL ACQuire PROTate Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the pulse rotate setting to use during external clock input ACQuire PROTate lt NRf gt NRf 1 to 24000 ACQUIRE PROTATE 100 ACQUIRE PROTATE gt ACQUIRE PROTATE 100 puewwoy ACQuire RLENgth Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the record length ACQuire RLENgth lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1000 to 2000000000 Step 1000 2500 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 1000000 2500000 5000000 10000000 25000000 50000000 100000000 250000000 500000000 1000000000 2000000000 only possible during hard disk recording 5000000000 10000000000 20000000000 50000000000 ACQUIRE RLENGTH 10000 ACQUIRE RLENGTH gt
162. Rameter TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE 5 5 HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE gt HISTORY PARAMETER TRANGE 5 0000000 00000 5 000000000000 HISTory RECord Function Sets or queries the source record Syntax HISTory RECord lt NRf gt MINimum HISTory RECord lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 Specify MINimum to specify the minimum record number Example HISTORY RECORD 1 HISTORY RECORD gt HISTORY RECORD 1 pueululo 2 HISTory RECord MINimum Function Queries the minimum record number Example HISTORY RECORD MINimum HISTORY RECORD 4 Description This command returns the record number of the oldest data in the history function During measurements this value is fixed to 0 Use this command when the DL850 DL850V is not performing measurements HISTory SMODe Function Sets or queries the history waveform search mode Syntax HISTory SMODe OFF ZONE PARameter HISTory SMODe Example HISTORY SMODE ZONE HISTORY SMODE gt HISTORY SMODE ZONE HISTory DATE Function Queries the trigger date of the data at the specified record number Syntax HISTory DATE NRf MINimum lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 Example HIST DATE 1 gt HIST DATE 0001 2010 02 02 Description If you specify a record number that is lower than MINimum this command will return IM DL850 17EN 5 87 5 16 HISTory Group HISTory TIM
163. SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 FILE SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 1 Description When the Trace All setting is set to OFF the source waveforms of waveforms that are displayed and that have this setting set to ON will be saved You cannot specify waveforms by sub channel 5 78 IM DL850 17EN 5 13 FILE Group FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL Trace A11 Function Sets or queries the selection method for the waveforms that will be saved for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat TALL Example FILE SAVE BINARY TALL ON FILE SAVE BINARY TALL gt FILE SAVE BINARY TALL 1 Description ON All channels whose waveforms are displayed will be saved OFF The channels whose waveforms are displayed and whose waveforms are set to be saved will be saved FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval Function Sets or queries the data removal interval that is used when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval lt NRf gt OFF FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval FILE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL 5 FILE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL gt FILE SAVE ASCII INTERVAL 5 lt NRf gt 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 5000 Example FILE SAVE ASCii TINFormation Function Sets or queries whether time information is included when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii TINFormation l
164. SCHannel lt x gt MATH x DELay REFerence SOURce Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE SOURCE TRACE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe Function Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay between channels for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence TRACe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE 1 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY REFERENCE TRACE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe Function Sets or queries the display format of the delay parameters of the specified channel Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe TIME OFF DEGRee MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay STATe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE TIME MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY STATE TIME MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue Function Queries a measured
165. SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 9 Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE COUNT 2 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe Function Sets or queries a source waveform slope that will be used to measure delay between channels for a waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe RISE FALL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MEASure SLOPe Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE RISE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY MEASURE SLOPE RISE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence Function Queries all reference waveform settings used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay REFerence COUNt Function Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform
166. SCii BINary FLOat HISTory Function Sets or queries what waveforms the history memory feature will save for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat HISTORY ONE ALL FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat HISTORY Example FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY ALL FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY gt FILE SAVE BINARY HISTORY ALL FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe Function Sets or queries the save range for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe MAIN Z1 Z2 CURSor FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat RANGe Example FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE CURSOR FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE gt FILE SAVE BINARY RANGE CURSOR FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANge lt x gt Function Sets or queries the cursor position for when data is to be saved using a cursor range Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANGe x lt NR gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat CRANGe lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt Resolution depends on the measurement length FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt Function Sets or queries the waveform that will be saved for a specific type of data Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt Example FILE SAVE BINARY STRACE CHANNEL1 ON FILE
167. SION 1 Description This command is valid when you have set the waveform to save to the full range of waveforms on the main screen Data can only be saved in binary format Example puewwoy FILE SAVE COMMent Function Sets or queries the comment that will be saved Syntax FILE SAVE COMMent String FILE SAVE COMMent String Up to 250 characters FILE SAVE COMMENT WAVEFORM 1 FILE SAVE COMMENT gt FILE SAVE COMMENT WAVEFORM 1 Description You can only use the characters and symbols on the keyboard that appears on the DL850 DL850V screen Q is 1EH and p is 1FH expressed Example in ASCII code FILE SAVE NAME Function Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved Syntax FILE SAVE NAME Filename FILE SAVE NAME DFILE SAVE NAME CASE1 gt FILE SAVE NAME gt FILE SAVE NAME CASE1 Example IM DL850 17EN 5 79 5 14 GONogo Group The commands in this group deal with GO NO GO determination You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the SHIFT MEASURE keys on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN GONogo Function Queries all GO NO GO determination settings Synta
168. SOut MFORmat command is set to STANdard String 0 to 7FF When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to EXTended String 0 to 1FFFFFFF CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID 7FF CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID gt CHANNEL1 CAN SCHANNEL1 MID 7FF Error 151 Invalid string data will occur if an invalid string is specified CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT Start BIT Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the bit number of the starting position of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 63 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 10 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 SBIT 10 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount Bit Count Function Sets or queries the bit length of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 2 to 16 2 to 32 on firmware versions 1 2 and later Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 10 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 BICOUNT 10 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer Byte Order Function Sets or queries the endianness used to save to
169. Sets or queries the analysis source start point of the FFT windows Syntax FFT STARt lt NRf gt FFT STARt lt NRf gt 5 to 5 Example FFT START 5 FFI START gt FFT START 5 000000000000 Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT WINDow Function Queries all FFT analysis settings Syntax FFT WINDow FFT WINDow TYPE Function Sets or queries the computation window type for FFT analysis Syntax FFT WINDow TYPE HANNing RECTangle FLATtop EXPonential HAMMing FFT WINDow TYPE Example FFT WINDOW TYPE HANNING FFT WINDOW TYPE gt FFT WINDOW TYPE HANNING Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT WINDow EXPonential Function Queries all FFT exponential window settings Syntax FFT WINDow EXPonential FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Function Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s damping rate Syntax FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe NRf FFT WINDow EXPonential DRATe Example FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE gt FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 Description NR 1 to 100 the initial value and the setting are the same for Window 1 and Window 2 5 74 IM DL850 17EN 5 12 FFT Group FFT WINDow EXPonential FORCe lt x gt Function Sets or queries the FFT exponential window s Force1 or Force2 value Syntax FFT WINDow EXPonential FORCe x NRf FFT WINDow E
170. Sets or queries the number of pulses per rotation of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PROTate lt NRf gt 1 to 99999 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP PROTATE 100 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP PROTATE gt CHANNELS FREQ SETUP PROTATE 100 Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Function Resets the pulse count of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup RESet Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP RESET CHANnel x FREQ SETup STOPpredict Function Sets or queries whether stop prediction is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup STOPpredict lt NRf gt OFF CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup STOPpredict lt NRf gt 1 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT 10 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT gt CHANNELS FREQ SETUP STOPPREDICT 10 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the time unit when measuring velocity of an installed frequency module gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit HOUR MIN SEC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup TUNit CHANNELS FREQ SETUP TUNIT MIN CHANNELS FREQ SETUP TUNIT gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP TUNIT MIN CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UNIT Sets or queries the pulse integration unit of an F
171. T lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 LOW Example TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH OW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnelcx SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel x CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this comma
172. TE lt Frequency gt TIMebase SRATE lt Frequency gt 5Hz 10Hz 20Hz 50Hz 100Hz 20MHz 50MHz 100MHz Example TIMEBASE SRATE 500kHz TIMEBASE SRATE gt TIMEBASE SRATE 500 00000E 03 TIMebase TDIV Function Sets or queries the T DIV value Syntax TIMebase TDIV lt Time gt HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOUR8 HOURY HOUR10 HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 TIMebase TDIV Time 100ns to 1800s Example TIMEBASE TDIV ims TIMEBASE TDIV gt TIMEBASE TDIV 1 000E 03 IM DL850 17EN 5 121 pueululo 5 34 TRIGger Group The commands in this group deal with triggers You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the TRIGGER group keys MODE SIMPLE ENHANCED POSITION and DELAY keys on the front panel TRIGger Function Queries all trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TRIGger ABN A gt B n Function Queries all A gt B n trigger settings Syntax TRIGger ABN TRIGger ABN COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of times condition B must be met for A gt B n triggers Syntax TRIGger ABN COUNt lt NRf gt TRIGger ABN COUNCt lt NRf gt 1 to 10000 Example TRIGGER ABN COUNT 100 TRIGGER ABN COUNT gt TRIGGER ABN COUNT 100 TRIGger ACTion Function Queries all action on trigger settings Syntax TRIGger ACTion TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whe
173. TYPE Function Sets or queries the file format that waveforms are saved as on the storage medium when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCii BINary FLOat GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE GONOGO ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY GONogo COUNt Function Queries the number of GO NO GO determinations that were performed Syntax GONogo COUNt Example GONOGO COUNT gt GONOGO COUNT 10 GONogo LOGic Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination logic Syntax GONogo LOGic AND OR GONogo LOGic Example GONOGO LOGIC AND GONOGO LOGIC GONOGO LOGIC AND GONogo MODE Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination mode Syntax GONogo MODE OFF PARameter ZONE GONogo MODE Example GONOGO MODE ZONE GONOGO MODE GONOGO MODE ZONE GONogo NGCount Function Queries the GO NO GO determination NO GO count Syntax GONogo NGCount Example GONOGO NGCOUNT gt GONOGO NGCOUNT 10 GONogo PARameter Function Queries all parameter determination settings Syntax GONogo PARameter GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Function Queries all settings for the specified waveform parameter for parameter determination Syntax GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt CAUSe Function Queries whether the specified waveform parameter for
174. Tion SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt ONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory ONOGO ACTION SAVE RECTORY CASE1 ONOGO ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY gt ONOGO ACTION SAVE RECTORY CASE1 Example OG amp UD 0O G tU IM DL850 17EN 5 81 puewwog 5 14 GONogo Group GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Function Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe HD lt NRf gt NETWork SD USB NR GONogo ACTion SAVE DRIVe Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE HD GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE GONOGO ACTION SAVE DRIVE HD O Description Specify HD for the internal hard disk lt NRf gt This can be omitted if the disk is not partitioned For the DL850 DL850V internal hard disk omit this value or specify 0 Specify SD for the SD memory card Specify NETWork for a network drive Specify USB for a USB storage medium First lt NRf gt 0 to LUN or the partition number can be omitted On the DL850 DL850V this number is decided by the order that USB storage media are inserted into the device Partition numbers Internal hard disk 0 to 2 USB 0 to 3 GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Function Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE PATH gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE PATH PATH USB UTIL GONogo ACTion SAVE
175. UT DATA1 FF Description Error 151 Invalid string data will occur if an invalid string is specified CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC Data Length Code Function Sets or queries the byte size of the data section of the data frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut DLC lt NRf gt lt x gt 13 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 15 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC 15 CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT DLC 15 CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut FRAMe Function Sets or queries the format data or remote of the frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut FRAMe DATA REMote lt x gt 13 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME DATA CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT FRAME DATA IM DL850 17EN 5 33 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel x CAN OSOut MFORmat Message Format Function Sets or queries the message format standard or extended of the frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat EXTended STANdard lt x gt 13 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT EXTENDED CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MFORMAT EXTENDED Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MID Message ID Function Sets or queries the message ID of the frame used for one shot output Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MID lt String gt lt x gt 13 to 16 e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat
176. WAVeform commands will be applied to Syntax WAVeform RECord MINimum lt NRf gt WAVeform RECord lt NRf gt 0 to 4999 WAVEFORM RECORD 4 WAVEFORM RECORD WAVEFORM RECORD 4 Description Specify MINimum to specify the minimum record number The minimum record number is the record number of the oldest data Example WAVeform RECord MINimum Function Queries the minimum record number in the history memory for the main waveform Syntax WAVeform RECord MINimum Example WAVEFORM RECORD gt WAVEFORM RECORD 8 WAVeform SEND Function Queries the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform data Syntax WAVeform SEND lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 this varies depending on the measurement time sample rate and memory model When data is being sent in BYTE or WORD format WAVeform SEND gt 49 9 digit number of bytes data byte Example Sequence When data is being sent in ASCII format WAVeform SEND lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Description lt NRf gt can be omitted If you specify lt NRf gt waveform data is queried lt NRf gt times in order starting from the record located at the record number specified by WAVeform RECord lt NRf gt If the number of bytes of binary data that are being sent exceeds the 9 digit number the data will not be sent If the output format is PP and the original data is less
177. WWINdow SYNC TRACe Function Sets or queries the synchronization channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe NRf AUTO RIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe Rf 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE 1 RIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE gt RIGGER WWINDOW SYNC TRACE 1 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE 1 TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE gt TRIGGER WWINDOW REFCYCLE 1 5 132 IM DL850 17EN 5 35 WAVeform Group The commands in this group deal with the acquired waveform data There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group WAVeform Function Queries all waveform data output settings Syntax WAVeform WAVeform BITS Function Queries the bit length of the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform BITS Example WAVEFORM BITS gt WAVEFORM BITS 16 WAVeform BYTeorder Function Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes or longer Syntax WAVeform BYTeorder LSBFirst MSBFirst WAVeform BYTeorder Example WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST WAVEFORM BYTEORDER WAVEFORM BYTEORDER LSBFIRST Description This command is only valid in the WAVeform group WAVeform CAPTure Function Queries all capture data output settings Syntax WAVeform CAPTure WAVeform CAPTure END Function Sets or queries the end point to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVe
178. XPonential FORCe lt x gt Example FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 gt FFT WINDOW EXPONENTIAL FORCE1 100 Description lt NRf gt 1 to 100 the initial value and the setting are the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT WAVeform lt x gt Function Queries all FFT window settings lt x gt 1 2 Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE Function Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis type Syntax FFT WAVeform x TYPE LS PS PSD CS TF CH FFT WAVeform lt x gt TYPE x 1 2 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE PS FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 TYPE PS Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe Sub Type Function Sets or queries an FFT window s analysis sub type Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe REAL IMAG MAG PHASe LOGMag FFT WAVeform lt x gt STYPe x 1 2 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE LOGMAG FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 STYPE LOGMAG Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries whether an FFT window is displayed Syntax FFT WAVeform x MODE lt Boolean gt gt FFT WAVeform lt x gt MODE x 1 2 Example FFT WAVEFORMI1 MODE ON FFT WAVEFORM1 MODE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 MODE 0 Description lt x gt 2 is val
179. Y6 XY7 XY8 CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE XY2 CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL TRACE XY2 Example CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt Function Queries all Y axis value settings for an H cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt CURSor XY HORizontal Y lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for an H cursor on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSoOr XY HORizontal Y x STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY HORizontal Y x STATe x 1 2 Example CURSOR XY H CURSOR XY H CURSOR XY H o RIZONTAL Y1 STATE ON RIZONTAL Y1 STATE gt RIZONTAL Y1 STATE 1 je o CURSor XY HORizontal Y x VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of an H cursor on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal Y x VALue x 1 2 Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE 150 00000E 00 CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all marker cursor settings for the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 5 66 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor XY MARKer M x POSition Function Sets or queries a marker cursor s time axis equivalent position on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor XY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt
180. YTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit x to 16 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2X lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale MODE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE AXB CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE MODE gt CHANNE
181. a for protected user data for PUD and PUD PUD and PUD are not supported The length of the RDT and RDT resource names RDT and RDT are not supported IM DL850 17EN App 5 xipueddy E Appendix 3 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard 19 The change in the status due to RST LRN RCL and SAV RST and LRN See section 5 38 Common Command Group RCL and SAV These common commands are not supported 20 The extent of the self test using the TST command Performs the same internal memory test that is executed when the user presses UTILITY and then the Self Test soft key and executes the MEMORY test 21 The structure of the extended return status See chapter 6 22 Whether each command is processed in an overlapped manner or sequentially See section 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller and chapter 5 23 The description of the execution of each command See the explanations of each command s function in chapter 5 the features guide IM DL850 01EN and the user s manual IM DL850 02EN App 6 IM DL850 17EN Index A Page abbreviated fOftn irn trenes 4 5 analysis source start point FFT ssessssssss 5 74 analysis source points number FFT sssssse 5 74 angle cursor qi dn pen oore a ASCII character codes 2 attenuation constant FFT sssssseene 5 74 attenuation constant MATH sss 5 92 a
182. a remus eave 5 61 horizontal magnification zoom horizontal position capture hysteresis frequefcy s pe tpe trt per tege a 5 38 l Page IFC Interface Clear tme reete rta 3 7 initialization serenor 5 90 input coupling 16CH voltage we 5 51 input coupling acceleration voltage wen 02 input coupling analog voltage ssssesess 5 48 input coupling frequeriGy erotici eese 5 38 input coupling temperature ses 5 47 iriterisity meets es 5 71 IRIG format 5 118 IRIG mod latiOh n nen eene prenne 5 118 K Page KEY WOCK equ EE 5 118 L Page LGD brighittiess ore tee rte et rete ees 5 119 linear scaling 16CH voltage sesesesseessss 5 52 linear scaling analog voltage sssssssss 5 48 linear scaling frequency 5 39 linear scaling strain es 5 45 LLO LEocal Eockout ths eee 3 7 local loCKOUt cnr eros 5 56 log SEARING ctis cc Bep ee mereri epe Renta 5 91 logic history 5 87 logic condition history 5 88 M mari al trigger tento eE marker cursor T Y ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeees marker cursor X Y measurement pulse frequency medium free space 3 tenu language er ient entie estt dad dEc s UIS cen conte cha estetgencsssesuntivassasieseescapary cies
183. age GONogo ZONE PATTern lt x gt ZONE Sets or queries the specified determination pattern s source waveform zone 5 84 data for waveform zone determination GONogo WAIT Waits for the completion of GO NO GO determination by using a timeout 5 84 value COPy Group HCOPy Queries all screen capture data output settings 5 85 HCOPy COMMent Sets or queries the screen comment 5 85 HCOPy DIRection Sets or queries the data output destination 5 85 HCOPy EXECute Executes data output 5 85 HCOPy NETPrint Queries all network printer output settings 5 85 HCOPy NETPrint TONE Sets or queries whether data will be printed in color from the network printer 5 85 HCOPy NETPrint TYPE Sets or queries the network printer output command type 5 85 HISTory Group HISTory Queries all of the settings for the history feature 5 86 HISTory ABORt Aborts the history search 5 86 HISTory CLEar Clears the data of all history waveforms 5 86 HISTory DISPlay Sets or queries the history start and end numbers that will be displayed 5 86 HISTory DMODe Display MODE Sets or queries the history waveform display mode 5 86 HISTory EXECute Executes the history waveform search This is an overlap command 5 86 HISTory PARameter Queries all history waveform parameter search settings 5 86 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries all the specified parameter s settings for history waveform parameter 5 86 searches HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt
184. age VARiable Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed module that can 5 50 perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage VDIV Sets or queries the V div setting of an installed module that can perform 5 51 analog voltage measurements CHANnel x VOLTage ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed module that can 5 51 perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Queries all settings of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module 5 51 SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the label string of the specified sub channel for the specified 5 51 SCHannel x LABel 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel x VOLTage Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 51 SCHannel lt x gt BWIDth Module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 51 SCHannel lt x gt COUPling Module CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 52 SCHannel x INVert installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel x1 VOLTage Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 52 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the scaling coeffici
185. al cursor on the T Y 5 62 STATe display is displayed IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor TY HORizontal Y x Queries the Y axis value of a horizontal cursor on the T Y display 5 62 VALue CURSor TY MARKer Queries all marker cursor settings for the T Y display 5 62 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Queries all settings related to the marker cursor measurement items for the 5 62 T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Queries all AX value settings AX is between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 62 display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 62 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Queries the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 63 VALue CURSor TY MARKer M x DY y Queries all AY value settings AY is between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 63 display CURSor TY MARKer M x DY y Sets or queries whether the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y 5 63 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY MARKer M x DY y Queries the AY value between the marker cursors on the T Y display 5 63 VALue CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Sets or queries a marker cursor position
186. ame operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT SETUP keys on the front panel CALibrate Function Queries all calibration settings Syntax CALibrate CALibrate EXECute Function Executes calibration This command is different from the common command CAL in that this command does not return the results when the calibration is completed This is an overlap command Syntax CAL EXEC CALibrate MODE Function Sets or queries the auto calibration mode Syntax CALibrate MODE AUTO OFF Example CALIBRATE MODE AUTO CALIBRATE MODE gt CALIBRATE MODE AUTO 5 28 IM DL850 17EN 5 5 CAPTure Group The commands in this group deal with the dual capture feature You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SHIFT ACQUIRE keys on the front panel CAPTure Function Queries all dual capture settings Syntax CAPTure CAPTure ACTion Function Queries all dual capture action settings Syntax CAPTure ACTion CAPTure ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as one of the capture actions Syntax CAPTure ACTion BUZZer lt Boolean gt CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER ON CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER gt CAPTURE ACTION BUZZER 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding buzzer settings of other actions Example CAPTure ACTion MAIL Function Queries all dual capture action e mail transmission set
187. ameter gt XYlInteg XY2Integ Example MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG MAXIMUM gt MEASURE XY1 XYLINTEG MAXIMUM NAN Description This command returns NAN for any statistics that cannot be processed MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the specified waveform s waveform parameter measurement item is ON or OFF Syntax MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe lt Boolean gt MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt STATe Parameter XYlInteg XY2Integ Example MEASURE XY1 XY1INTEG STATE ON MEASURE XY1 XY1LINTEG STATE gt MEASURE XY1 XY1INTEG STATE 1 MEASure XY lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue Function Queries the measured value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure XY x Parameter VALue lt NRf gt XY x s x 1 to 8 lt NRf gt 1 to 48000 lt Parameter gt XYlInteg XY2Integ Description This command returns NAN if the value cannot be measured Parameters cannot be measured if the measurement has not been performed or if the measurement was performed but computations were not performed because the specified range exceeded 10 Mpoint The lt NRf gt is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN Not A Number if the specified value does not exist For non cyclic statistical processing lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt
188. an FFT cursor peak cursor Syntax CURSor FFT PEAK lt x gt Y VALue lt x gt 1 2 cursors 1 and 2 Example CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y VALUE gt CURSOR FFT PEAK2 Y VALUE 30 933333E 00 CURSor FFT TYPE Function Sets or queries the FFT cursor type Syntax CURSor FFT TYPE OFF PEAK MARKer CURSor FFT TYPE Example CURSOR FFT TYPE PEAK CURSOR FFT TYPE gt CURSOR FFT TYPE PEAK CURSor TY Function Queries all cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY CURSor TY DEGRee Function Queries all angle cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt Function Queries all angle difference D lt x gt settings for the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DXX x 1 2 CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt STATe lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 STATE 1 CURSor TY DEGRee D lt X gt VALue Function Queries the angle difference D lt x gt between the angle cursors on
189. and enables or disables overlapping Example COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 CHANnell VDIV lt PMT gt COMMunicate OVERlap HFFBF enables overlapping for commands other than media access Because overlapping of file loading is disabled FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASE1 operates in the same way as a sequential command Thus CHANnell VDIV is not executed until file loading is completed Using the OPC Command The OPC command sets the OPC bit which is bit 0 in the standard event register see page 6 4 to 1 when the overlapping is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H0040 ESE 1 ESR SRE 32 FILE LOAD SETup EXECute CASEI1 OPC PMT Read the response to ESR Wait for a service request CHANnell VDIV PMT The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to select which command to apply OPC to Here it is applied to the media access command ESE 1and SRE 32 indicate that a service request is only generated when the OPC bit is 1 ESR clears the standard event register In the example above CHANne11 VDIV is not executed until a service request is generated IM DL850 17EN 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller Using the OPC Query The OPC query generates a response when an overlapping operation is completed Example COMMunicate OPSE H004
190. ands Command Function Page DISPlay Queries all display settings 5 70 DISPlay ACCumulate Queries all accumulated waveform display settings 5 70 DISPlay ACCumulate MODE Sets or queries the accumulated waveform mode 5 70 DISPlay ACCumulate PERSistence Sets or queries the number of times that waveforms are accumulated 5 70 DISPlay CINFormation Channel Sets or queries the contents of the channel information display 5 70 Information DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries a waveform color 5 70 SCHannel lt x gt COLor DISPlay COLor BASecolor Sets or queries the base color of the screen 5 70 DISPlay DECimation Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that are used on the 5 70 dot display DISPlay ESIZe Extra window Sets or queries the size of the extra window 5 71 Size DISPlay FORMat Sets or queries the display format the number of divisions in the vertical 5 71 direction DISPlay GRATicule Sets or queries the grid type 5 71 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt Queries all display group settings 5 71 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Queries all source waveform settings for a display group 5 71 DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the source that is assigned to the specified source waveform 5 71 SOURce of the specified display group DISPlay GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt ZNUMber Zone Number Sets or queries the zone number that displa
191. anenste SUM PIG see HESEPI WAVE WITIdOW nett tert ntn Mtem tego trigger date history trigger position trigger time history U Page nit TECH Voltage ceo eret tror ponerme ra neri peent 5 53 unit acceleration 2 eee ER Lene d 5 33 nit analog voltage tr eem ae 5 50 unit CAN 5 36 unit requerncy octets en iic aene cete ms 5 39 5 42 lang dudo s E 5 96 unit strain es 5 46 nit temperature 2t ide Erie 5 48 upper level query etna etd eerte enira drei esa e eid 4 4 USB cable ee 2 3 USB hub wa 2 8 USB iriterface iei eee cie eee ve e EE Eva Eds 2 2 USB keyboard cerea eie teas 5 120 user verificatlon eene rec rv edi deci i d edo ees 1 3 V Page VIDIV 16CH voltage erret 5 54 V DIV analog voltage nio tr harena 5 51 Value Div frequency cerneret ierit ecce 5 43 V cursor T Y ss V CUSO CY roce etes erre ene erre Ee termes naan 5 68 vertical position 16CH voltage sssssssssss 5 54 vertical position acceleration ssesssssss 5 32 vertical position analog voltage sssssss 5 50 vertical position frequency d vertical position logie ritiro rere croceo vertical scale 16CH voltage vertical scale analog voltage vertical scale center value vertical scale sensitivity FFT
192. ange varies depending on the range setting Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable Function Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV Function Sets or queries the V DIV setting of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 Voltage 200mV to 2V Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical
193. ar scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y NRf CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y xi 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 PIX or P2X s lt NRE gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 P1Y or P2Y s NRf 9 9999E 25 to 1E 25 0 1E 25 to 9 9999E 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE PiX 1 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE P1X gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE P1X 1 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT Function Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT lt xl gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 lt x2 gt to lt String gt Up to 4 characters Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE UNIT UU IM DL850 17EN 5 53 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet Function Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt OFFSet lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt
194. ated to the specified XY window Syntax XY WINDow lt x gt XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge Function Sets or queries the T Y waveform range to display in the XY window Syntax gt XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt XY WINDow lt x gt TRANge lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00div Resolution 10 record length Example XY WINDOW1 TRANGE 5 5 XY WINDOW1 TRANGE gt XY WINDOW1 TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 pueululo 2 XY WINDow x MODE Function Sets or queries whether the specified XY window is displayed Syntax XY WINDow lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt XY WINDow x MODE x 1 2 Example XY WINDOW1 MODE ON XY WINDOW1 MODE gt XY WINDOWI MODE 1 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt Function Queries all settings related to the specified XY waveform Syntax XY WAVeform x1 XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay Function Sets or queries whether the specified XY waveform is displayed Syntax XY WAVeform x1 DISPlay Boolean XY WAVeform lt x1 gt DISPlay lt xl gt 1 to 8 Example XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY ON XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY gt XY WAVEFORM1 DISPLAY 1 IM DL850 17EN 5 137 5 36 XY Group XY WAVeform lt x1 gt XTRace Function Syntax Example Description You cannot select the channel of a logic module Sets or queries the channel that is assigned to the specified XY waveform s X axis XY WAVeform xl XTRace lt NRf gt lt NRf gt
195. ation of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PROBe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 10 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE 1 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PROBE 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup Function Sets or queries whether pull up is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut PULLup lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PULLUP ON CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PULLUP gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT PULLUP 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe Function Sets or queries the input slope of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe FALL RISE CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut SLOPe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE RISE CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT SLOPE RISE CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold Function Sets or queries the threshold level of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold lt Voltage gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut THReshold x to 16 Voltage 100 to 100V Example CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD 0 00000E 00 CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT THRESHOLD 0 00000E 00
196. aveform is being measured in the frequency domain NAN is returned CURSor TY VERTical POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries a V cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY VERTical POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 4 CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL POSITION2 4 000000000000 CURSor TY VERTical TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical TRACe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ALL CURSor TY VERTical TRACe lt NRf gt to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt to 16 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE 2 CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL TRACE 2 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Function Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt x 1 2 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt STATe x 1 2
197. ay MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries the statistics count of the delay between channels 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay COUNt MEASure CHANnel x Queries a statistic of the delay between channels 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay MA Ximum MEAN MINimum SDEViation MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all the settings for a source waveform for measuring the delay 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels of a waveform MEASure MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the number of source waveforms at which delay between 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channels will be measured for a waveform MEASure COUNt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries a source waveform slope that will be used to measure delay 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform MEASure SLOPe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all reference waveform settings used to measure the delay between 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channels for the specified waveform REFerence MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the edge detection count of the reference waveform used to 5 98 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform REFerence COUNt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the edge detection slope of the reference waveform used to 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x
198. between the V cursors on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY VERTical DY Queries all Y axis value settings for V cursors on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for V cursors on the T Y display is 5 64 displayed CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue Queries the Y axis value of V cursors on the T Y display 5 64 CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Queries all 1 AT value settings 1 AT is between the V cursors on the T Y 5 64 display CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Sets or queries whether the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y 5 65 STATe display is displayed CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Queries the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display 5 65 VALue CURSor TY VERTical Sets or queries a V cursor position on the T Y display 5 65 POSition lt x gt CURSor TY VERTical TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the V 5 65 cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Queries all X axis value settings for a V cursor on the T Y display 5 65 CURSor TY VERTical X lt x gt Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a V cursor on the T Y display is 5 65 STATe displayed IM DL850 17EN 5 9 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CURSor TY VERTical X
199. bit is 1 when the internal printer is operating or when data is being transmitted to a network printer Bit 6 ACS Accessing This bit is 1 when a drive is being accessed Bit 7 MES Measuring This bit is 1 when automated measurement of waveform parameters is in progress Bit 8 HST History Search This bit is 1 when a history search is in progress Bit 10 NGO Go No Go This bit is 1 when a GO NO GO search is in progress Bit 11 SCH Search This bit is 1 when a search is in progress Bit 12 RUN Running This bit is 1 when a measurement is in progress Bit 14 AN Analysis This bit is 1 when an analysis is in progress The transition filter parameters detect changes in the specified condition register bits numeric suffixes 1 to 16 and overwrite the extended event register in the following ways RISE The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 FALL The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 1 to 0 BOTH The specified extended event register bit is set to 1 when the corresponding condition register bit changes from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 NEVer Always zero sjioday snjeis Hu IM DL850 17EN Output and Error Queues Output Queue The output queue stores query response messages For example if you send a WAVeform SEND command which requests for the transmission of
200. ble Initial Value ee Range of VDIV of VDIV the Offset 701250 55 5mV to 20V me ee setting x 5 701251 1 mV to 20 V 20 mV to 200 V 701265 0 1 mV to 10 V 701275 5mV to 10V 720210 10 mV to 20 V CHANnel x VOLTage ZOOM Function Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an 701261 62 5mV to 20V 5V ror26162 Smvezv sv installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage ZOOM x to 16 lt NRf gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 D 714 0 8 0 833 Ly 1 11 1 25 2 33 1 43 1 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 67 8 l0 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 100 However the 701260 has the following limits When using 1 1 probe attenuation and 50 V div 0 25 to 100 When using 1 1 probe attenuation and 100 V div 0 5 to 100 When using 1 1 probe attenuation and 200 V div 1 to 100 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM 1 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE ZOOM 1 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all settings of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries the label string of the specified sub channel for the specified 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SC
201. ble Registers The following registers are used to mask a bit so that the bit will not affect the status byte even when it is set to 1 Service request enable register Masks bits of the status byte Standard event register Masks bits in the standard event register Extended event register Masks bits in the extended event register Reading and Writing to Registers For example you can use the ESE command to set the standard event register bits to ones and zeros You can use the ESE command to query whether the standard event register bits are ones or Zeros For details on commands see chapter 5 IM DL850 17EN 6 2 Status Byte Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESBMAVEES EAV 1 0 MSS e Bits 0 and 7 Not used always zero Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 EAV Error Available This bit is 1 when the error queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when an error occurs For details see page 6 6 Bit 3 EES Extend Event Summary Bit This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the extended event register and its corresponding event register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details see page 6 5 Bit 4 MAV Message Available This bit is 1 when the output queue is not empty In other words this bit is set to 1 when there is data to be transmitted in response to a query For details see page 6 6 e Bit 5 ESB Event Summary B
202. c pattern searches Syntax SEARdh LSTate BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW SEARdh LSTate BIT lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 8 Example SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 HIGH SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 gt SEARCH LSTATE BIT1 HIGH SEARCh LSTate SOURce Function Sets or queries the trace to perform the logic pattern search on Syntax SEARch LSTate SOURce NRf lt NRf gt SEARCh LSTate SOURCe lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Second lt NRf gt 1 to 16 sub channel Example SEARCH LSTATE SOURCE 7 SEARCH LSTATE SOURCE gt SEARCH LSTATE SOURCE 7 SEARCh LSTate COUNt Function Sets or queries the logic pattern search count Syntax SEARCh LSTate COUNt lt NRf gt SEARch LSTate COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000000 Example SEARCH LSTATE COUNT 100 SEARCH LSTATE COUNT gt SEARCH LSTATE COUNT 100 Description This setting is the same as the edge search count setting SEARCh SELect Function Sets the search point that is displayed on the zoom window and queries the zoom position of that search point Syntax SEARCh SELect NRf MAXimum SEARCh SELect lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example SEARCH SELECT 4 SEARCH SELECT gt SEARCH SELECT 0 721900000000 Description The string NAN is returned if the search could not retrieve a position puewwoy SEARCh SELect MAXimum Function Queries the maximum save number which is the number that is attached to the last posi
203. caling settings of an installed frequency module 5 39 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale AVALue Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 39 an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale BVALue Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is used during linear scaling for 5 39 an installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 39 GETMeasure installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale MODE Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed frequency module 5 39 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2yY Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 39 frequency module IM DL850 17EN spuewwog 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt FREQ LSCale UNIT Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed frequency module 5 39 CHANnel x FREQ OFFSet Sets or queries the offset of an installed frequency module 5 40 CHANnel x FREQ POSition Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed frequency module 5 40 CHANnel x FREQ SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 40 frequency module CHANnel x FREQ SETup Queries all the FV sett
204. codes Addressable mode Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key Then set the network interface Device to GPIB and the address to a number from 0 to 30 Press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE to switch the DL850 DL850V to local mode These keys are disabled when local lockout has been activated by a controller Function Subset Name Description Source handshaking SH1 Full source handshaking capability Acceptor handshaking AH1 Full acceptor handshaking capability Talker T6 Basic talker capability serial polling untalk on MLA My Listen Address and no talk only capability Listener L4 Basic listener capability unlisten on MTA My Talk Address and no listen only capability Service request SR1 Full service request capability Remote local RL1 Full remote local capability Parallel polling PPO No parallel poll capability Device clear DC1 Full device clear capability Device trigger DTO No device trigger capability Controller CO No controller capability Electric characteristics E1 Open collector Data Transfer Rate The following table contains approximations of how much time it takes for the DL850 DL850V to transmit waveform data Model DL850 DL850V Controller PC Pentium 4 3 2 GHz GP IB GPIB USB B OS Windows XP Programming language Visual C Number of Data Points Byte Data Word Data ASCII Data 1000 Approx 24 ms Approx 20 ms Approx 54 ms 10000 Approx 31 ms Approx 44
205. command is set to STANdard String 0 to 7FF e When the CHANnel lt x gt CAN OSOut MFORmat command is set to EXTended String 0 to 1TFFFFFFF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID 7FF CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID gt CHANNEL13 CAN OSOUT MID 7FF Example CHANne1l lt x gt CAN PORT Function Queries all the port settings of a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT lt x gt 13 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe Function Sets or queries the bitrate of a CAN bus signal port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe lt NRf gt lt x gt 13 to 16 lt NRf gt 10000 20000 33300 50000 62500 66700 83300 125000 250000 500000 800000 1000000 Example CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE 33300 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT BRATE 33300 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum Bit sample num Function Sets or queries the number of sample points for each bit of a CAN bus signal port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BSNum lt NRf gt lt x gt 13 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 3 CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT LONLy Function Sets or queries the Listen Only setting for a CAN bus monitor module port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT LONLy Boolean lt x gt 13 to 16 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY ON CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT LONLY 1 Example CHANnel x CAN PORT SJW Sync jump width Function Sets or queries the resynchronizat
206. command is valid on models with the G2 option a t MATH x AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage COUNt NRf MATHEx AVERage COUNC x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example MATH1 AVERAGE COUNT 16 MATH1 AVERAGE COUNT gt MATHl AVERAGE COUNT 16 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2n steps Example MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt MATH1 AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH x AVERage MODE Function Sets or queries the averaging mode Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage MODE CYCLe EXPonent LINear OFF PEAK MATH x AVERage MODE x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Example MATH1 AVERAGE MODE EXPONENT MATH1 AVERAGE MODE gt MATH1 AVERAGE MODE EXPONENT Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE Function Se
207. creen for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe NRf NRf Frequency Frequency lt Time gt lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SCALe lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt Frequency Time The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SCALE 5000 5000 CHANNELS FREQ SCALE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SCALE 5 000000E 03 5 000000E 03 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Function Queries all the FV settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency Function Sets or queries the center frequency of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 50Hz 60Hz 400Hz Example CHANnel5 FREQ SETup CFRequency 60 CHANnel5 FREQ SETup CFRequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup CFRequency 60 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration Function Sets or queries whether deceleration prediction is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DECeleration lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DECELERATION ON CHANNELS FREQ SETUP DECELERATION gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP DECELERATION 1
208. ctions unilaterally but there are no commands that have parameters that restrict one another 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Items that are included in the functional or composite header elements constituting a command See chapters 4 and 5 Buffer sizes that affect block data transmission When block data is being transmitted the output queue is expanded to match the size of the data that is being transmitted A list of program data elements that can be used in equations and their nesting limitations Equations cannot be used Syntax of the responses to queries See the example of the commands given in chapter 5 Communication between devices that do not follow the response syntax is not supported by the DL850 DL850V Size of the response data block 1 to 2004000 bytes A list of supported common commands See section 5 38 Common Command Group Device condition after a successful calibration The device will be performing measurements The maximum length of block data that can be used for the DDT trigger macro definition Not supported The maximum length of the macro label for defining macros the maximum length of block data that can be used for the macro definition and the process when recursion is used in macro definitions Macro functions are not supported Reply to the IDN query See section 5 38 Common Command Group Size of storage are
209. d see chapter 5 Bit Masking To mask a certain bit of the standard event register so that it does not cause bit 5 ESB in the status byte to change set the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register to zero For example to mask bit 2 QYE so that ESB will not be set to 1 even if a query error occurs set bit 2 of the standard event enable register to zero Do this using the ESE command To query whether each bit of the standard event enable register is 1 or 0 use ESE For details on the ESE command see chapter 5 Standard Event Register Operation The standard event register indicates eight types of events that occur inside the DL850 DL850V When one of the bits in this register becomes 1 and the corresponding bit of the standard event enable register is also 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 Example 1 A query error occurs 2 Bit 2 QYE is set to 1 3 If bit 2 of the standard event enable register is 1 bit 5 ESB in the status byte is set to 1 You can also check what type of event occurred in the DL850 DL850V by reading the contents of the standard event register Reading the Standard Event Register You can use the ESR command to read the contents of the standard event register The register is cleared after it is read Clearing the Standard Event Register The standard event register is cleared when The contents of the standard e
210. d on Syntax CAPTure WINDow lt x gt MODE Boolean CAPTure WINDow lt x gt MODE Example CAPTURE WINDOW MODE ON CAPTURE WINDOW MODE gt CAPTURE WINDOW MODE 1 CAPTure WINDow CAPNum Function Sets or queries the number of the waveform that is displayed in the dual capture window Syntax CAPTure WINDow CAPNum NRf MAXimum MINimum CAPTure WINDow CAPNum lt NRf gt 5000 to 5000 Example CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM 1 CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM gt CAPTURE WINDOW CAPNUM 1 Description When the capture mode is set to Auto Current 1 2 Current The latest waveform 1 The waveform that was captured before the Current waveform 2 The waveform that was captured two waveforms before the Current waveform If you specify MAXimum the Current waveform is specified If you specify MINimum the number of the oldest waveform is specified When the capture mode is set to On Start Current 1 2 Current The latest waveform 1 The oldest waveform 2 The second oldest waveform the waveform that was captured before the Current waveform If you specify MAXimum the waveform that was captured before the Current waveform is specified If you specify MINimum the number of the oldest waveform is specified CAPTure WINDow POSition Function Sets or queries the dual capture window horizontal position Syntax CAPTure WINDow lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CAPTure WINDow x POSiti
211. d queues Appendix Provides reference material such as an ASCII character code table Index IM DL850 17EN iii How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Notes and Cautions The notes and cautions in this manual are categorized using the following symbols PCM Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences CAUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Character Notations Hard Key Names and Soft Key Names in Bold Characters Indicate panel keys that are used in the procedure and soft keys and menu items that appear on the screen SHIFT Panel Key When SHIFT panel key appears in a procedural explanation it means to press the shift key so that its indicator lights and then to press the indicated panel key A setup menu for the item written in purple above the key that you pressed appears on the screen Unit k Denotes 1000 Example 100 kS s sample rate K Denotes 1024 Example 720 KB file size Metasyntax The following table contains the symbols that are used in the syntax discussed mainly in chapters 4 and 5 These symbols are referre
212. d to as BNF Backus Naur Form symbols For details on how to write data using these symbols see pages 4 6 and 4 7 Symbol Description Syntax Example Example lt gt A defined value CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL2 Select an optionin COUPling AC DC DC50 GND COUPLING AC Exclusive OR Can be omitted TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe TRIGger SLOPe IM DL850 17EN Contents How to Use This Manwual esses nnne nnnnnnn onai oaod nieo iani se aas sas aa ses esl iii Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Component Names and Functions ssssssssssssssssssesee eene eene nnns nnne 1 1 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications ssssssssssssesse 1 2 Connecting to the Ethernet Interface sssssssssssssssssesseseseenee nennen nnne 1 4 Configuring the DL850 DL850V Ethernet SettingS ccccceeseeeeeeeeeesteeseeeeeesneeeeeeaes 1 5 USB Interface 2 1 2 2 2 3 24 Component Names and Functions sss eene nennen nnne 2 1 USB Interface Features and Specifications sssssssssssseeeeeeee 2 2 Connecting to the USB Interface ecce eret ettet pentes Rea dr uei Eee 2 3 Configuring the DL850 DL850V USB Settings eessse 2 4 GP IB Interface Optional 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 Component Names and Functions
213. delay value of the specified waveform s parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue lt NRf gt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 DELAY VALUE 0 0000000E 00 Description This command returns NAN if the value puewwoy cannot be measured e lt NRf gt is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN if the specified value does not exist lt NRf gt can be omitted If it is omitted the measured values of the newest waveform in history memory are queried If you include lt NRf gt the measured value of the waveform lt NRf gt times before the newest history waveform will be queried MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal Function Queries all distal mesial and proximal settings Syntax MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MODE Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal point mode setting Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt DPRoximal DE PERCent UNIT EASure CHANnel lt x gt DPRoximal MODE EASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL DE PERCENT EASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MODE gt EASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL MODE PERCENT Example Ss S O FS SF O IM DL850 17EN 5 99 5 24 MEASure Gr
214. demark names Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Revisions e 1st Edition June 2010 2nd Edition September 2010 2nd Edition September 2010 YK All Rights Reserved Copyright 2010 Yokogawa Meters amp Instruments Corporation IM DL850 17EN i About the USB Interface and Ethernet Interface To use the USB communication features your PC must have the following DL850 DL850V library TMCTL USB device driver for connecting the DL850 DL850V to the PC To use the Ethernet communication features your PC must have the following DL850 DL850V library TMCTL To download the library and driver listed above go to the following Web page and then browse to the download page http www yokogawa co jp tm F SOFT IM DL850 17EN How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This manual contains six chapters and an appendix Chapter 1 Ethernet Interface Describes the features and specifications of the Ethernet interface Chapter 2 USB Interface Describes the features and specifications of the USB interface Chapter 3 GP IB Interface Optional Describes the features and specifications of the GP IB interface Chapter 4 Programming Overview Describes command syntax and other programming information Chapter 5 Commands Describes every command individually Chapter 6 Status Reports Describes the status byte various registers an
215. e CLEar Group CLEar Clears traces 5 55 S COMMunicate Group 3 COMMunicate Queries all communication settings 5 56 3 COMMunicate HEADer Sets or queries whether headers are attached to query responses 5 56 a COMMunicate LOCKout Sets or clears local lockout 5 56 o COMMunicate OPSE Sets or queries the overlap command that is used by the OPC OPC and 5 56 WAI commands COMMunicate OPSR Queries the operation pending status register 5 56 COMMunicate OVERlap Sets or queries the commands that operate as overlap commands 5 56 COMMunicate REMote Sets or queries whether the DL850 DL850V is in remote or local mode ON 5 56 is remote mode COMMunicate VERBose Sets or queries whether query responses are returned in full or abbreviated 5 56 form COMMunicate WAIT Waits for a specified extended event to occur 5 56 COMMunicate WAIT Creates the response that is returned when a specified extended event 5 57 occurs CURSor Group CURSor Queries all cursor measurement settings 5 58 CURSor FFT Queries all FFT cursor settings 5 58 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Queries all settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor 5 58 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Queries all AF display settings AF is between the FFT cursors marker 5 58 cursors CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Sets or queries whether the AF value between the FFT cursors marker 5 58 STATe cursors is displayed CURSor FFT MARKer M lt
216. e MODE installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 46 DISPlaytype DECimalnum display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the 5 46 DISPlaytype SUBunit display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 46 o GETMeasure installed strain module o CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed strain module 5 46 3 CHANnel lt x gt STRain Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 46 D LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y strain module 2 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale SHUNt Executes shunt calibration 5 46 d CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale UNIT Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed strain module 5 46 CHANnel lt x gt STRain RANGe Sets or queries the measurement range of an installed strain module 5 46 CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed strain 5 47 module CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Sets or queries the unit of an installed strain module 5 47 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Queries all the settings of a module if the module in the specified chan
217. e MOD Module 5 6 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x1 gt Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 53 VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt 16 CH Voltage Input Module LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2yY CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed 16 CH Voltage 5 53 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale UNIT Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module 5 54 SCHannel lt x2 gt 0FFSet CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 54 SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 54 SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries how the vertical scale is set for an installed 16 CH Voltage 5 54 SCHannel lt x2 gt VARiable Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the V DIV setting of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module 5 54 SCHannel lt x2 gt VDIV CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 54 SCHannel x2 Z00M Modul
218. e TIME lt x gt lt Time gt TRIGger TOTime TIME lt x gt lt Time gt 10ns to 10s x 1 2 Example TRIGGER TOTIME TIME1 0 001 TRIGGER TOTIME TIMEl1 gt TRIGGER TOTIME TIME1 1 00000000E 03 IM DL850 17EN 5 131 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger TYPE Function Sets or queries the trigger type Syntax TRIGger TYPE ABN ADB AND EOA BBETween BLTime BGTime BTOut OR Ple TGTime TLTime TITime TOTime Ndow Gger TYPE Example TRIGGER TYPE SIMPLE TRIGGER TYPE gt TRIGGER TYPE SIMPLE M I R R TRIGger WWINdow Function Queries all wave window trigger settings Syntax TRIGger WWINdow TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt lt Boolean gt TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 ON TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 gt TRIGGER WWINDOW CHANNEL1 1 Description The DL850 DL850V cannot perform wave window triggering on modules that have sub channels logic modules modules that are performing temperature measurements and frequency modules TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency Function Sets or queries the cycle frequency for wave window triggers Syntax TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency lt Frequency gt TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency Frequency 40 to 1000 Hz Example TRIGGE
219. e medium that waveform data is saved to as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH Example TRIGger ACTion SAVE PATH gt TRIG ACT SAVE PATH Path HD 1 20090506 TRIGger ADB A Delay B Function Queries all A Delay B trigger settings Syntax TRIGger ADB TRIGger ADB DELay Function Sets or queries the delay time for condition B for A Delay B triggers Syntax TRIGger ADB DELay lt Time gt TRIGger ADB DELay lt Time gt Ons to 10s Example TRIGGER ADB DEL 0 001 TRIGGER ADB DEL TRIGGER ADB DELAY 1 0000000E 03 Description The resolution is 10 ns TRIGger AND Function Queries all AND trigger settings Syntax TRIGger AND IM DL850 17EN 5 123 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger AND CHANnel x BIT x Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel x BIT x DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel x BIT x TRIGGER AND CHANNEL9 BIT1 DONTCARE TRIGGER AND CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL9 BIT1 DONTCARE Example TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT x DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt E
220. e medium where screen 5 122 CDIRectory captures are saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Sets the storage medium that screen captures are saved to as an action 5 122 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe PATH Queries the path on the storage medium where screen captures are saved 5 122 to as an action TRIGger ACTion MAIL Queries all settings for sending e mail as an action on trigger 5 122 TRIGger ACTion MAIL COUNCt Sets or queries the e mail transmission limit for when e mail is sent as an 5 123 action TRIGger ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is sent as an action 5 123 TRIGger ACTion MODE Sets or queries whether action on trigger is used 5 123 TRIGger ACTion SAVE Queries all the settings related to saving data as an action on trigger 5 123 TRIGger ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether waveform data is saved to the storage medium as 5 123 an action TRIGger ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the type of data to save when waveform data is saved to the 5 123 storage medium as an action TRIGger ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Changes the current directory on the storage medium that waveform data is 5 123 saved to as an action 5 20 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page TRIGger ACTion SAVE DRIVe Sets the storage medium that waveform data is saved to as an action 5 12
221. e next program message at any time If the controller sends a program message that contains a query the controller must finish receiving the response message before it can send the next program message If the controller sends the next program message before receiving the response message in its entirety an error will occur A response message that is not received in its entirety will be discarded If the controller tries to receive a response message when there is none an error will occur If the controller tries to receive a response message before the transmission of the program message is complete an error will occur If the controller sends a program message containing multiple message units but the message contains incomplete units the DL850 DL850V will try to execute the ones that are believed to be complete However these attempts may not always be successful In addition if such a message contains queries the DL850 DL850V may not necessary return responses Deadlock The DL850 DL850V can store at least 1024 bytes of messages in its transmit and receive buffers the number of available bytes varies depending on the operating conditions If both the transmit and receive buffers become full at the same time the DL850 DL850V will no longer be able to operate This condition is called a deadlock If this happens you can resume operation after you have discarded response messages Deadlock will not occur if the pr
222. ecified overlap command is completed 5 141 OPT Queries the installed options 5 142 RST Initializes settings 5 142 SRE Sets or queries the service request enable register value 5 142 STB Queries the status byte register value 5 142 TST Performs a self test and queries the result The self test consists of tests of 5 142 each kind of internal memory WAI Holds the execution of the subsequent command until the specified overlap 5 142 command is completed 5 24 IM DL850 17EN 5 2 ACQuire Group The commands in this group deal with waveform acquisition You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the ACQUIRE key on the front panel ACQuire Function Queries all waveform acquisition settings Syntax ACQuire ACQuire AVERage Function Queries all averaging settings Syntax ACQuire AVERage ACQuire AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions to perform during averaging Syntax ACQuire AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt INFinity lt NRf gt 2 to 65536 in 2 steps Example ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT INFINITY ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT gt ACQUIRE AVERAGE COUNT INFINITY ACQuire AVERage EWEight Exponent Weight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax ACQuire AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2 steps Example ACQUIRE AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 ACQUIRE AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt ACQUI
223. ected if the rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected for all other cases Aresponse message is always returned with a 1 if the value is ON and with a 0 if the value is OFF String data String data is not a predefined character string like character data It can be any character string The character string must be enclosed in single quotation marks or double quotation marks Form Example String data ABC IEEE488 2 1987 Ifa character string contains a double quotation mark the double quotation mark is expressed as two consecutive quotation marks This rule also applies to single quotation marks Aresponse message is always enclosed in double quotation marks String data is any character string Therefore the DL850 DL850V assumes that the remaining program message units are part of the character string if no single or double quotation mark is encountered As a result no error is detected if a quotation mark is omitted Filename Filename is data that indicates a file name The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt Character data String data 1 CASE CASE lt NRf gt is rounded to an 8 digit integer and converted to ASCII code The result is the file name example 1 becomes 00000001 Negative values are not allowed The first 12 characters of character data or the first 16 c
224. ed Syntax Z00M WLAYout VERTical SIDE ZOOM WLAYout Example ZOOM WLAY SIDE ZOOM WLAY gt ZOOM WLAY SIDE ZOOM Z2Target Function Sets or queries the source window of Z2 when both Z1 and Z2 are displayed Syntax Z200M Z2Target MAIN Z1 ZOOM Z2Target Z00M Z2TARGET MAIN ZOOM Z2TARGET gt ZOOM Z2TARGET MAIN Example 5 140 IM DL850 17EN 5 38 Common Command Group The commands in this group are defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 and are independent from the instrument s individual functions There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group CAL Function Syntax Example Description CLS Function Syntax Example Description ESE Function Syntax Example Description Executes calibration and queries the result CAL CAL gt 0 This command returns 0 if calibration is completed successfully and 1 otherwise Clears the standard event register extended event register and error queue CLS CLS Ifthe CLS command is located immediately after the program message terminator the output queue is also cleared For information about each register and queue see chapter 6 Sets or queries the standard event enable register ESE lt NRf gt ESE lt NRf gt 0 to 255 ESE 251 ESE gt 251 Specify the value as a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format For example specifying ESE 251 will cause the standard e
225. een SDC and DCL In multi line messages SDC messages are those that require talker or listener designation and DCL messages are those that do not require the designation Therefore the SDC command affects a specific device while the DCL command affects all devices on the bus IM DL850 17EN Chapter 4 4 1 Messages Programming Overview Messages Messages are used to exchange information between the controller and the DL850 DL850V Messages that are sent from the controller to the DL850 DL850V are called program messages and messages that are sent from the DL850 DL850V back to the controller are called response messages If a program message contains a command that requests a response a query the DL850 DL850V returns a response message upon receiving the program message The DL850 DL850V returns a single response message in response to a single program message Program Message The program message syntax is as follows Program message unit E lt PMT gt lt Program Message Unit gt A program message consists of one or more program message units Each unit corresponds to one command The DL850 DL850V executes the commands in the order that they are received Separate each program message unit with a semicolon For details on the program message syntax see the next section Example iACQuire MODE NORMal COUNt 1 lt PMT gt Unit Unit lt PMT gt lt PMT gt is a program messa
226. eform acquisition 5 115 STORe Group STORe Queries all the information related to setup data in the internal memory 5 116 STORe SETup lt x gt Queries information about the setup data in the specified location of the 5 116 internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt COMMent Sets or queries the comment for the setup data that is stored to the specified 5 116 location in the internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt DATE Queries the date and time of the setup data that is stored to the specified 5 116 location in the internal memory STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute Saves setup data to the specified location in the internal memory 5 116 SYSTem Group SYSTem Queries all system settings 5 117 SYSTem CLICk Sets or queries whether click sounds are produced 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk Queries all date time settings 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk DATE Sets or queries the date 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk FORMat Sets or queries the date format 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk MODE Sets or queries whether the date and time are displayed 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Queries all SNTP settings 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Uses SNTP to set the date and time 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Sets or queries the time difference from GMT when SNTP is being used 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk TIME Sets or queries the time 5 117 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Sets or queries whether the date and time are set manually or by using 5 117 SNTP SYSTem IRIG Queries all IRIG settings
227. el Example MONITOR RANGE CHANNEL1 gt MONITOR RANGE CHANNEL1 5 0000000E 00 MONitor SEND ALL Function Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format Syntax MONitor SEND ALL Example MON SEND ALL gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte sequence Description The number of output bytes for each channel is based on the value specified by the MONitor FORMat CHANnel x command Channels whose input is off are not sent MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format of the specified channel Syntax MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MON SEND CHAN1 gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte sequence Example Description The number of output bytes for each channel is based on the value specified by the MONitor FORMat CHANnel x command Channels whose input is off are not sent MONitor VERBose Function Set whether to include labels and units in the response to the MONitor ASENd command Syntax MONitor VERBose lt Boolean gt MONitor VERBose MONITOR VERBOSE ON MONITOR VERBOSE MONITOR VERBOSE 1 Example MONitor LATCh ASENd Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels Syntax MONitor LATCh ASENd Example MONITOR LATCH ASEND gt The response format
228. en the 5 49 DISPlaytype SUBunit display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel x VOLTage LSCale Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 49 GETMeasure installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel x VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed module that can perform 5 49 MODE analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed 5 50 LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2yY module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the linear scaling unit string of an installed module that can 5 50 UNIT perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage OFFSet Sets or queries the offset voltage of an installed module that can perform 5 50 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage POSition Sets or queries the vertical position of an installed module that can perform 5 50 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe Sets or queries the probe type of an installed module that can perform 5 50 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 5 50 module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLT
229. en the keys are locked a password is required to release the key lock and a password has been set SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword Set password Function Sets the password that is used to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword lt String gt lt String gt Up to 8 characters Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT SPASSWORD ABC Description Send the command SYSTem KEYProtect SPASsword to reset the password 5 118 IM DL850 17EN 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem LANGuage Function Sets or queries the message language Syntax SYSTem LANGuage CHINese ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian JAPANese KORean SPANish SYSTem LANGuage Example SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM LANGUAGE SYSTEM LANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTem LCD Function Queries all LCD settings Syntax SYSTem LCD SYSTem LCD AUTO Function Queries all the settings for the feature that automatically turns off the backlight Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Function Sets or queries whether the feature that automatically turns off the backlight is on Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem LCD AUTO MODE Example SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE ON SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE gt SYSTEM LCD AUTO MODE 1 SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME Function Sets or queries the amount of time until the backlight is turned off Syntax SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME lt NRf gt SYSTem LCD AUTO TIME lt NRf gt
230. ent A that is used during linear scaling for 5 52 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale AVALue an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an 5 52 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed 16 CH 5 52 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale Voltage Input Module DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an 5 52 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module DISPlaytype MODE CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 53 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module DISPlaytype DECimalnum CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the 5 53 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module DISPlaytype SUBunit CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an 5 53 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale GETMeasure installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input 5 53 SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCal
231. er 5 181 Invalid outside macro definition The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications Communication Execution Errors 200 to 299 Code Message Corrective Action Page 221 Setting conflict Check settings that are related to each other Chapter 5 222 Data out of range Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 223 Too much data Check data byte lengths Chapter 5 224 Illegal parameter value Check the ranges of the settings Chapter 5 225 OverFlow Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length including lt PMT gt 4 2 226 Out Of Memory 241 Hardware missing Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length including lt PMT gt Check that the specified options are all installed 4 2 260 Expression error Mathematical operations cannot be used 270 Macro error The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 272 Macro execution error The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 273 Illegal macro label The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 275 Macro definition too long The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 276 Macro recursion error The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications 277 Macro redefinition not allowed The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro speci
232. erence condition waveform zone sssse 5 83 Mj eR tener aki dee iies 4 7 remote and local modes switching LEMOS On locAl aain ea remote terminal REN Remote Enable tcd ertet te ee r SpOrns8 act on o ei nci c cin TEETE response message responses without headers RUC temperaltie iscces coco ete ros reir eene rk TETEA S Page sample rate ae eee rage ties esed ia 5 121 SAVE TNE MAMC CET 5 79 Scaling MATE niis 5 95 scaling coefficient 16CH voltage 5 52 scaling coefficient analog voltage sss 5 48 scaling coefficient frequency 5 39 scaling coefficient strain 5 45 Screen base color 5 70 Screen capture printing GO NO GO ssss 5 80 Screen capture printing trigger sessssssse 5 122 Screen capture saving GO NO GO sssssss 5 80 Screen capture saving trigger SDC Selected Device Clear seseessssss SEAC MIS OLY P oereemetesnracieaseetseenteemensers Searchvend position nesini aa Search Start poSltlOIE m ipaa Een he rd self test xis sensitivity acceleration sessssesssess shunt calibration strain esiisa side panel 1 1 2 1 3 1 SIngl amp SEBEU n ceri cro er eroi iit Er He esie 5 112 Index 2 IM DL850 17EN
233. eries the sample rate of the capture waveform specified by the 5 134 WAVeform TRACe command WAVeform CAPTure STARt Sets or queries the start point to use when capturing waveform data 5 134 WAVeform CAPTure TRIGger Queries the trigger position represented as a number of points in the 5 134 captured waveform WAVeform DATaselect Queries whether to query the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 134 command using ACQ data or PP data WAVeform END Sets or queries the end data point in the waveform specified by the 5 134 WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform FORMat Sets or queries the transmission data format 5 134 WAVeform LENGth Queries the total number of data points in the waveform specified by the 5 134 WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform MODule Queries the module of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 134 command WAVeform OFFSet Queries the offset value used to convert the waveform data specified by the 5 135 WAVeform TRACe command to physical values WAVeform RANGe Queries the measurement range used to convert the waveform data 5 135 specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values WAVeform RECord Sets or queries the main waveform record number that WAVeform 5 135 commands will be applied to WAVeform RECord MINimum Queries the minimum record number in the history memory for the main 5 135 waveform WAVeform SEND Queries the waveform data s
234. eries whether remote signals to stop measurements will be ignored ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem RCMode Boolean SYSTem RCMode Example SYSTEM RCMODE ON SYSTEM RCMODE SYSTEM RCMODE 1 SYSTem SCALefont Function Sets or queries the font size that is used for waveform labels and scale values Syntax SYSTem SCALefont SMALI LARGe SYSTem SCALefont SYSTEM SCALEFONT SMALL SYSTEM SCALEFONT SYSTEM SCALEFONT SMALL Description Even if you specify LARGe with this command depending on the display conditions the SMALI font may be displayed Example SYSTem SOITem Scale On ITEM Function Sets or queries which scales are displayed Syntax SYSTem SOITem ALL TSCale SYSTem SOITem Example SYSTEM SOITEM ALL SYSTEM SOITEM SYSTEM SOITEM ALL SYSTem STORage MEDia Function Sets or queries the medium that you want to format Syntax SYSTem STORage MEDia HD SD UUSB LUSB SYSTem STORage MEDia Example SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA SD SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA SYSTEM STORAGE MEDIA SD Description HD SD SD memory card UUSB LUSB USB storage medium Internal hard disk SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Function Formats the specified medium This is an overlap command Syntax SYSTem STORage FORMat EXECute Example SYSTEM STORAGE FORMAT EXECUTE SYSTem TSYNchro Time Synchronization Function Sets or queries the time synchronization Syntax SYSTem TSYNc
235. ernet Settings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the DL850 DL850V remotely through an Ethernet interface Communication interface Network connection timeout setting UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl D lt Device 7 Set Device to Network Network A Time Out 7 Set the timeout value using the jog shuttle Note Only use the selected communication interface If you send commands simultaneously from another communication interface that has not been selected the DL850 DL850V will not execute the commands properly Configuring TCP IP Settings To use the Ethernet interface features you must specify the following TCP IP settings P address Subnet mask Default gateway For details on how to specify these settings see section 17 2 Configuring TCP IP Settings in the DL850 DL850V User s Manual M DL850 02EN IM DL850 17EN 1 5 92ej19 U 39uJ9U13 Chapter2 USB Interface 2 1 Component Names and Functions Front Panel SHIFT key and CLEAR TRACE key Press these keys to switch from remote mode in which settings and operations are performed through remote commands to local mode in which operations can be performed using the DL850 DL850V keys These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 2 2 has been activated by a controller 7 YOKO
236. erval Example TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL HOUR1 TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL gt TRIGGER TIMER INTERVAL HOUR1 TRIGger TIMer TIME Function Sets or queries the time for time triggers Syntax TRIGger TIMer TIME String TRIGger TIMer TIME String HH MM SS Example TRIGGER TIMER TIME 00 00 00 TRIGGER TIMER TIME gt TRIGGER TIMER TIME 00 00 00 TRIGger TITime Function Queries all T1 lt T lt T2 trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TITime TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T1 T T2 triggers Syntax TRIGger TITime TIME x Time TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt lt Time gt 10ns to 10s x 1 2 Example TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 0 001 TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 gt TRIGGER TITIME TIME1 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger TLTime Function Queries all T lt Time trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TLTime O TRIGger TLTime TIME 3 Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt Time i triggers A Syntax TRIGger TLTime TIME lt Time gt TRIGger TLTime TIME Time 10ns to 10s Example TRIGGER TLTIME TIME 0 001 TRIGGER TLTIME TIME gt TRIGGER TLTIME TIME 1 00000000E 03 TRIGger TOTime Function Queries all T T1 T2 T trigger settings Syntax TRIGger TOTime TRIGger TOTime TIME lt x gt Function Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt T1 T2 lt T triggers Syntax TRIGger TOTim
237. es the computation range Syntax MATH lt x gt MREFerence lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MREFerence MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div Example MATH1 MREFERENCE 5 5 MATHI1 MREFERENCE gt MATH1 MREFERENCE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 MATH lt x gt OPERation Function Sets or queries the computation type Syntax MATH lt x gt OPERation PLUS MINus MULTiple BINary DIVIde SHIFt PS OFF USERdefine MATH x OPERation MATH lt x gt s x 1 to 8 Example MATH1 OPERATION PS MATH1 OPERATION gt MATH1 OPERATION PS Description The USERdefine parameter is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt SOURCe x Function Sets or queries a sub channel s computation type Syntax MATH lt x gt SOURce lt x gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt MATH lt x gt SOURCe lt x gt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 SOURce lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 Description You cannot use this command when no modules are installed MATH lt x gt SCALe Function Queries all scaling settings Syntax MATH x SCALe MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE Function Sets or queries a scale mode Syntax MATH lt x gt SCALe MODE AUTO MANual MATH x SCALe MODE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 Example MATH1 SCALE MODE AUTO MATH1 SCALE MODE gt MATH1 SCALE MODE AUTO
238. es whether to query the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command using ACQ data or PP data Syntax WAVeform DATaselect ACOData PPData WAVeform DATaselect WAVEFORM DATASELECT ACQDATA WAVEFORM DATASELECT WAVEFORM DATASELECT ACQDATA Example WAVeform END Function Sets or queries the end data point in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform END lt NRf gt WAVeform END lt NR gt 0 to 50100000000 WAVEFORM END 10000 WAVEFORM END WAVEFORM END 10000 Description You can query the total number of data points that have been acquired by using the WAVeform LENGth command Example WAVeform FORMat Function Sets or queries the transmission data format Syntax WAVeform FORMat ASCii BYTE WORD DWORd WAVeform FORMat WAVEFORM FORMAT ASCII WAVEFORM FORMAT gt WAVEFORM FORMAT ASCII Description The DWORd format setting is valid on a CAN bus monitor module when the bit length of the transmission data is greater than 17 Example WAVeform LENGth Function Queries the total number of data points in the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform Syntax WAVeform LENGth WAVEFORM LENGTH WAVEFORM LENGTH 10010 Description The total number of data points varies depending on the DL850 DL850V settings For details see appendix 1 Relationship between the Time Axi
239. essage of the last error that has occurred Syntax STATus ERRor Description If no errors have occurred 0 No error is returned You can use the STATus QMESsage command to specify whether the message is included STATus FILTer lt x gt Function Sets or queries the transition filter Syntax STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer STATus FILTer lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 16 Description Set how each bit in the condition register must change to trigger the setting of an event If you specify RISE a change from 0 to 1 triggers the setting of an event STATus QENable Function Sets or queries whether messages other than errors will be stored to the error queue ON or not OFF Syntax STATus QENable lt Boolean gt STATus QENable Example STATUS QENABLE ON STATUS QENABLE STATUS QENABLE 1 STATus QMESsage Function Sets or queries whether message information will be attached to the response to the STAT ERR query ON or not OFF Syntax STATus QMESsage lt Boolean gt STATus QMESsage STATUS QMESSAGE ON STATUS QMESSAGE STATUS QMESSAGE 1 Example 5 114 IM DL850 17EN 5 30 STOP Group The command in this group is used to stop waveform acquisition You can execute the same operation that you can by using the START STOP key on the front panel STOP Function Stops waveform acquisition Syntax STOP Description If recording is in progress
240. f the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL9 BIT1 HIGH Example TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt DONTcare HIGH TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel of condition A Syntax TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s x 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER ATRIGGER CHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels 5 124 IM DL850 17EN 5 34
241. ference angle on the T Y display 5 61 CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 61 angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt Queries all measured value settings for an angle cursor on the T Y display 5 61 CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe Sets or queries whether the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y 5 61 display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee Y x VALue Queries the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display 5 61 CURSor TY HORizontal Queries all horizontal cursor settings for the T Y display 5 61 CURSor TY HORizontal DY Queries all AY axis settings of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display 5 62 CURSor TY HORizontal DY Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the horizontal cursors on 5 62 STATe the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY HORizontal DY Queries the AY axis value of the horizontal cursors on the T Y display 5 62 VALue CURSor TY HORizontal Sets or queries a horizontal cursor position on the T Y display 5 62 POSition lt x gt CURSor TY HORizontal TRACe Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the 5 62 horizontal cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt Queries all Y axis settings of the horizontal cursor on the T Y display 5 62 CURSor TY HORizontal Y x Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for a horizont
242. ff lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 2 to 30 in 0 2 steps MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 10 0 MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 gt MATH1 FILTER1 CUTOFF1 10 0 Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example gt MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of a digital filter Syntax MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE GAUSs IIR SHARp MATH lt x gt FILTer lt x gt TYPE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify FILTer lt x gt 1 2 MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE GAUSS MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE gt MATH1 FILTER1 TYPE GAUSS Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option Example 5 94 IM DL850 17EN 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt LABel Function Sets or queries a computed waveform label Syntax MATH lt x gt LABel String MATH lt x gt LABel MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt String gt Up to 16 characters Example MATH1 LABEL ABC MATH1 LABEL gt MATH1 LABEL ABC MATH lt x gt MODE Function Sets or queries whether the DL850 DL850V is in computation mode Syntax MATH lt x gt MODE lt Boolean gt MATH x MODE MATH lt x gt 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Example MATH1 MODE ON MATH1 MODE gt MATH1 MODE 1 MATH lt x gt MREFerence Function Sets or queri
243. fications 278 Macro header not found The DL850 DL850V does not support the IEEE 488 2 macro specifications IM DL850 17EN App 3 xipueddy E Appendix 2 Error Messages Communication Query Errors 400 to 499 Code Message Corrective Action Page 410 Query INTERRUPTED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 420 Query UNTERMINATED Check the transmission and reception order 4 2 430 Query DEADLOCKED Keep program messages to 1024 bytes or less in length 4 2 including lt PMT gt 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response Do not write a query after IDN or OPT System Communication Errors 300 and 399 Code Message Corrective Action Page 300 Communication device specific error Servicing required 399 Fatal error in the communication driver Servicing required Other Error 350 Code Message Corrective Action Page 350 Queue overflow Read the error queue 6 6 Note Code 350 occurs when the error queue overflows This error is only returned in response to a STATus ERRor query it is never displayed on the screen App 4 IM DL850 17EN Appendix 3 About the IEEE 488 2 1992 Standard The DL850 DL850V s GP IB interface conforms to the IEEE 488 2 1992 standard This standard specifies that the following 23 items be stated in the document This section describes these items 1 2 3 4 5 b c d e Of
244. file 2 comment hard disk recording comment screen capture comment screen printing common command header computation range m computation window FFT sesseee corniditlon register coactos et ce edendis current cutoff freqUeriGy usce nete serena pez e core rz Cd GyCle averagltig oce eee icto erae dea c i Ate cycle trace measure eee ees cyclic statistical processing measure D Page damping Wate F ET uie tret te edens 5 74 damping rate MATA sic cdeni sree cori tti oe eres 5 94 DL 4 6 CANO AGING e 5 78 data saving data saving capture 5 29 data saving screen capture 5 89 data saving trigget iren aa 5 123 data transfer rate Ethernet sesssssssssss 1 2 data transfer rate GP IB is OO DCL Device Clear deadlock 2 en determination level search determinationloglo 11 cuperet ces determinatiorimode nennen determination range GO NO GO s determination range history esseusssss determinations number of distance per pulse frequency esessssss 5 40 dual Capture can tp EH ec epe ex a dte des 5 29 dual Capture length 2 2 picco oen re tee reci ced 5 30 E Page e mail transmission capture 5 2
245. form CAPTure END lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure END lt NRf gt 0 to the number of data points in the waveform that is being captured 1 Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE END 10000 WAVEFORM CAPTURE END WAVEFORM CAPTURE END 10000 WAVeform CAPTure LENGth Function Queries the number of data points in the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure LENGth Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE LENGTH gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE LENGTH 10010 WAVeform CAPTure RECord Function Sets or queries the record number to use when capturing waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum MINimum lt NRf gt WAVeform CAPTure RECord lt NRf gt 5000 to 5000 Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 R R puewwoy WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum Function Queries the largest record number of the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MAXimum Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD MAXIMUM gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 0 WAVeform CAPTure RECord MINimum Function Queries the smallest record number of the captured waveform Syntax WAVeform CAPTure RECord MINimum Example WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD MINIMUM gt WAVEFORM CAPTURE RECORD 1 WAVeform CAPTure SEND Function Queries specified capture waveform data Syntax WAVeform CAPTure SEND lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 5000 Example WAVeform CAPTure SEND Description
246. form is displayed Syntax ZOOM MODE lt x gt lt Boolean gt ZOOM MODE lt x gt Example ZOOM MODE1 ON ZOOM MODE1 gt ZOOM MODE1 1 ZOOM MOVE Function Sets or queries whether the movement of the zoom position to the latest position is enabled or disabled Syntax ZOOM MOVE lt x gt Boolean ZOOM MOVE lt x gt Example ZOOM MOVE1 ON ZOOM MODE1 gt ZOOM MODE1 1 ZOOM POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries the zoom position of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM POSition x lt NRf gt ZOOM POSition lt x gt x 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div ZOOM POS1 2 ZOOM POS1 gt ZOOM POS1 2 000000000000 Example ZOOM TDIV lt x gt Function Sets or queries the T DIV value of the specified zoom waveform Syntax Z00M TDIV x lt Time gt HOUR1 HOUR2 HOUR3 HOUR4 HOURS HOUR6 HOUR7 HOURS HOURS HOUR1O HOUR12 DAY1 DAY2 DAY3 ZOOM TDIV lt x gt x 1 2 sets the target zoom box Time the same as the T Div setting ZOOM TDIV1 100us Z00M TDIV1 gt ZOOM TDIV1 100 0E 06 Description Use this command when the DL850 DL850V is using the internal clock When the DL850 DL850V is using an external clock use the ZOOM MAG lt x gt command to set the magnification Example ZOOM WLAYout Window Layout Function Sets or queries the window layout that is used when waveforms are zoom
247. form parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Voltage DONTcare gt lt Current DONTcare gt Current DONTcare gt Time DONTcare gt Time DONTcare gt ONTcare gt lt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt NRf gt DONTcare gt lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DELay DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ lt lt lt Frequency DONTcare gt lt Frequency D lt HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt VALue Function Queries the specified parameter s measured value for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 Example HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM VALUE gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEMI VALUE 150 25000E 00 HISTory PARameter LOGic Function Sets or queries the logic to apply to history waveform searches Syntax HISTory PARameter LOGic AND OR x 1 to 4 Example HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC AND HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC gt HISTORY PARAMETER LOGIC AND HISTory PARameter TRANge Function Sets or queries the determination range of history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter TRANge lt NRf gt lt NRf gt HISTory PA
248. ge terminator The following three terminators are available NL new line Same as LF line feed ASCII code OAH END The END message as defined by IEEE 488 1 The data byte that is sent with the END message is the last data byte of the program message NL with an END message attached NL is not included in the program message NL END Program Message Unit Syntax The program message unit syntax is as follows C lt Program data gt Program header m Space Program Header The program header indicates the command type For details see page 4 3 Program Data Attach program data if there are conditions that are required to execute a command Separate the program data from the header with a space ASCII code 20H If there are multiple data values separate each data value with a comma For details see page 4 6 Example ACQuire MODE NORMal lt PMT gt V ped Header Data Response Message The response message syntax is as follows gs Response message unit al lt RMT gt lt Response Message Unit gt A response message consists of one or more response message units each response message unit corresponds to one response Separate each response message unit with a semicolon For details on the response message syntax see the next page Example ACQUIRE MODE NORMAL COUNT 1 lt RMT gt
249. ger logic trigger settings Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic TRIGger SIMP1e LOGic BIT Function Sets or queries the bit that sets the trigger slope Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT lt NRf gt TRIGger SIMPle LOGic BIT lt NRf gt 1 to 8 TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT 2 TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC BIT 2 Example TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe Function Sets or queries the slope for logic triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe FALL RISE TRIGger SIMPle LOGic SLOPe Example TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE FALL TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE LOGIC SLOPE FALL TRIGger SIMPl1e SLOPe o Function Sets or queries the trigger slope of the channel 3 specified by TRIGger SIMPle SOURce for simple i triggers E Syntax TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe RISE FALL BISLope TRIGger SIMPle SLOPe TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE gt TRIGGER SIMPLE SLOPE RISE Description You cannot use this command to set the setting when the trigger zone is EXTernal LINE or TIME Example TRIGger SIMPle SOURce Function Sets or queries the source for simple triggers Syntax TRIGger SIMPle SOURce lt NRf gt lt NR gt EXTernal LINE TIME TRIGger SIMPle SOURce lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt If the channel has sub channels this is the range of sub channel numbers TRIGGER SIMPLE SOURCE 1 TRIGGER S
250. gt DELay measure the delay between channels for the specified waveform REFerence SLOPe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether to set the reference point for measuring the delay 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform to a trigger point or to a waveform REFerence SOURce MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the reference waveform trace used to measure the delay 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay between channels for a waveform REFerence TRACe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the display format of the delay parameters of the specified 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay channel STATe MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries a measured delay value of the specified waveform s parameter 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DELay VALue MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all distal mesial and proximal settings 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal point mode setting 5 99 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal MODE MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as percentages 5 100 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as units 5 100 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT
251. gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 MATH1 DISPLAY ON MATH1 DISPLAY gt MATH1 DISPLAY 1 puewwoy Example MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt Function Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when an external clock is used Syntax MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COUNt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COUNt MATH lt x gt ESHift CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COUNt MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 NRf record length 2 The resolution is 1 MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT 10 MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT gt MATH1 ESHIFT CHANNEL1 COUNT 10 Example MATH lt x gt EXPonential Function Queries all exponential window settings Syntax MATH lt x gt EXPonential x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option IM DL850 17EN 5 93 5 20 MATH Group MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe Function Sets or queries the exponential window s damping rate Syntax MATH lt x gt EXPonential DRATe lt NRf gt MATH x EXPonential DRATe x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify lt NRf gt 1 to 100 MATH1 EXPONENTIAL DRATE 100 MATH
252. h FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE BWIDTH FULL Description List of Frequency Settings per Voltage Module Type List of Frequency Type Settings 500Hz 5kHz 50kHz 701250 55 500kHz When the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC When the input coupling is set to TC 40Hz 400Hz 4kHz 2Hz 8Hz 30Hz When the input coupling is set to a setting other than TC 40Hz 400Hz 4kHz When the input AUTO 2Hz 8Hz 30Hz coupling is set 10kHz 20kHz 40kHz 80kHz 160kHz 640kHz 1 28MHz 2MHz CHANnel x VOLTage COUPling Function Sets or queries the input coupling of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage COUPling AC DC GND ACRMS DCRMS TC ACCL CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling x 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING DC CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE COUPLING DC Description For 701250 701251 701255 or 720210 AC DC GND For 701260 AC DC GND ACRMS DCRMS For 701261 or 701262 AC DC GND TC For 701265 DC GND TC For 701275 AC DC GND ACCL CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage INVert Function Sets or queries whether the display is inverted ON or not OFF for an installed module that can perform ana
253. haracters of string data are the file name Response messages are always expressed in the string data form Forinformation about the number of characters in a file name expressed in the string data form see the DL850 DL850V User s Manual Block data Block data is any 8 bit data It is only used in response messages on the DL850 DL850V The syntax is as follows Form Example N N digit decimal number 800000010ABCDEFGHIJ data byte sequence N Indicates that the data is block data N indicates the number of succeeding data bytes digits in ASCII code e N digit decimal number Indicates the number of bytes of data example 00000010 10 bytes Data byte sequence Expresses the actual data example ABCDEFGHIJ e Data is comprised of 8 bit values 0 to 255 This means that the ASCII code OAH which stands for NL can also be included in the data Hence care must be taken when programming the controller IM DL850 17EN M9IAJ9AQ Buruiuej80Jd gt 4 5 Synchronization with the Controller Overlap Commands and Sequential Commands There are two types of commands overlap and sequential The execution of one overlap command can start before the execution of the previous overlap command is completed If you specify V div and send the next program message to query the result the DL850 DL850V always returns the most recent setting 5 V in this case CH
254. he H pulse interval that is used when the trigger output terminal output type is 1 Syntax TRIGger OUT TIME lt Time gt TRIGger OUT TIME Time 1ms 50ms 100ms 500ms Example TRIGGER OUT TIME 0 05 TRIGGER OUT TIME TRIGGER OUT TIME 50 000000E 03 TRIGger OUT TYPE Function Sets or queries the trigger output terminal output type Syntax TRIGger OUT TYPE lt NRf gt TRIGger OUT TYPE lt NRf gt 1 2 Example TRIGGER OUT TYPE 2 TRIGGER OUT TYPE TRIGGER OUT TYPE 2 Description The DL850 DL850V generates H pulses for a fixed interval when it triggers This corresponds to the Pulse setting on the menu The DL850 DL850V generates an L pulse when it triggers The L pulse is held during the post operation The DL850 DL850V switches to an H pulse when the post operation finishes This corresponds to the Normal setting on the menu TRIGger POSition Function Sets or queries the trigger position Syntax TRIGger POSition lt NRf gt TRIGger POSition lt NRf gt 0 to 100 in 0 1 steps TRIGGER POSITION 50 TRIGGER POSITION gt TRIGGER POSITION 50 Example 5 128 IM DL850 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger SIMP1le Function Queries all simple trigger settings Syntax TRIGger SIMPle TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLOPe Function Sets or queries the external trigger slope Syntax TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLOPe FALL RISE TRIGger SIMPle EXTernal SLO
255. he edge search on 5 108 SEARCh EVENt Queries all event search settings 5 108 SEARCh EVENt COUNt Sets or queries the event search event number 5 109 SEARch EVENt SOURce Sets or queries the event search source event 5 109 SEARch EXECute Executes the search This is an overlap command 5 109 SEARch LSTate Queries all logic pattern search settings 5 109 SEARch LSTate BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the level of the specified bit for logic pattern searches 5 109 SEARch LSTate SOURce Sets or queries the trace to perform the logic pattern search on 5 109 SEARch LSTate COUNt Sets or queries the logic pattern search count 5 109 SEARch SELect Sets the search point that is displayed on the zoom window and queries the 5 109 zoom position of that search point SEARcCh SELect MAXimum Queries the maximum save number which is the number that is attached to 5 109 the last position that the search retrieved SEARch EPOint End POint Sets or queries the search end position 5 109 SEARch SPOint Start POint Sets or queries the search start position 5 109 SEARch TIME Queries all time search settings 5 110 SEARCh TIME TIME Sets or queries the time of the time search 5 110 SEARch TWINdow Target WINdow Sets or queries the window that search results will be displayed in 5 110 SEARCh TYPE Sets or queries the search type 5 110 SEARch MAG lt x gt Sets or queries a zoom waveform magnification 5 110
256. he hysteresis of the synchronization channel for wave 5 132 HYSTeresis window triggers TRIGger WWINdow SYNC LEVel Sets or queries the level of the synchronization channel for wave window 5 132 triggers TRIGger WWINdow SYNC TRACe Sets or queries the synchronization channel for wave window triggers 5 132 5 22 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page WAVeform Group WAVeform Queries all waveform data output settings 5 133 WAVeform BITS Queries the bit length of the waveform data specified by the WAVeform 5 133 TRACe command WAVeform BYTeorder Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes 5 133 or longer WAVeform CAPTure Queries all capture data output settings 5 133 WAVeform CAPTure END Sets or queries the end point to use when capturing waveform data 5 133 WAVeform CAPTure LENGth Queries the number of data points in the captured waveform 5 133 WAVeform CAPTure RECord Sets or queries the record number to use when capturing waveform data 5 133 WAVeform CAPTure RECord Queries the largest record number of the captured waveform 5 133 MAXimum WAVeform CAPTure RECord Queries the smallest record number of the captured waveform 5 133 MINimum WAVeform CAPTure SEND Queries specified capture waveform data 5 133 WAVeform CAPTure SRATe Qu
257. his command specifies the display format of the date The communication response format of the date is fixed 1 Year month number day 2 Day month number year 3 Day month English abbreviation year last two digits 4 Day month English abbreviation year Example SYSTem CLOCk MODE Function Sets or queries whether the date and time are displayed Syntax SYSTem CLOCk MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem CLOCk MODE Example SYSTEM CLOCK MODE ON SYSTEM CLOCK MODE gt SYSTEM CLOCK MODE 1 SYSTem CLOCk SNTP Function Queries all SNTP settings Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Function Uses SNTP to set the date and time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP EXECute Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP EXECUTE puewwoy SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime Function Sets or queries the time difference from GMT when SNTP is being used Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime String SYSTem CLOCk SNTP GMTTime String HH MM 12 00 to 12 00 Example SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME gt SYSTEM CLOCK SNTP GMTTIME 09 00 SYSTem CLOCk TIME Function Sets or queries the time Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TIME String SYSTem CLOCk TIME String HH MM SS HH can be set to a value from 0 to 23 Example SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 10 00 00 SYSTEM CLOCK TIME SYSTEM CLOCK TIME 10 00 00 SYSTem CLOCk TYPE Functio
258. hro IRIG OFF SYSTem TSYNchro SYSTEM TSYNCHRO IRIG SYSTEM TSYNCHRO gt SYSTEM TSYNCHRO IRIG Description This command is valid on models with the C20 Example option SYSTem USBKeyboard Function Sets or queries the USB keyboard type Syntax SYSTem USBKeyboard ENGLish JAPANese SYSTem USBKeyboard SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD ENGLISH SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD SYSTEM USBKEYBOARD ENGLISH Example 5 120 IM DL850 17EN 5 33 TIMebase Group The commands in this group deal with time bases You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the TIME DIV knob on the front panel TIMebase Function Queries all time base settings Syntax TIMebase TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe Function Queries the sample rate of the specified channel Syntax TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe TIMebase CHANnel lt x gt SRATe lt x gt 1 to 16 Example TIMEBASE CHANNELI SRATE gt TIMEBASE CHANNEL1 SRATE 1 0000000E 06 Description This command returns the current setting the reserved value for the next measurement Use the WAVeform CAPTure SRATe command to query the measured data TIMebase SOURce Function Sets or queries the time base Syntax TIMebase SOURce EXTernal INTernal TIMebase SOURce Example TIMEBASE SOURCE INTERNAL TIMEBASE SOURCE gt TIMEBASE SOURCE INTERNAL TIMebase SRATe Function Sets or queries the sample rate Syntax TIMebase SRA
259. id on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Function Sets or queries an FFT window s horizontal axis display method Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis LINear LOG FFT WAVeform lt x gt HAXis Example FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS LOG FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS gt FFT WAVEFORM1 HAXIS LOG FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale Function Queries all FFT vertical scale settings Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Vertical Scale Mode Function Sets or queries an FFT window s vertical scale mode Syntax FFT WAVeform x VSCale MODE AUTO MANual FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale MODE Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE MODE AUTO FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE MODE gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE MODE AUTO puewwoy FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer Function Sets or queries the center value of an FFT window s vertical scale Syntax FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer NRf FT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale CENTer x 1 2 lt NR gt 1E 30 to 1E 30 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE CENTER 40 FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE CENTER gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE CENTER 40 0000E 00 Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option FFT WAVeform lt x gt VSCale SENSitivity Function Sets or queries the sensitivity of an FFT window s vertical scale Syntax FFT WAVeform x VSCALe SENSitivity lt NRf gt FFT WAVeform x VSCALe SENSitivit
260. ied channel of the specified logic 5 124 CONDition channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel x Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic 5 125 SCHannel lt x gt CONDition channel of condition A TRIGger ATRigger CONDition Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition A 5 125 TRIGger BGTime Queries all B gt Time trigger settings 5 125 TRIGger BGTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B Time triggers 5 125 TRIGger BLTime Queries all B Time trigger settings 5 125 TRIGger BLTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B Time triggers 5 125 TRIGger BTOut Queries all B TimeOut trigger settings 5 125 TRIGger BTOut TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for B TimeOut triggers 5 125 TRIGger BBETween Queries all B Between trigger settings 5 125 TRIGger BBETween TIME lt x gt Sets or queries a pulse width for B Between triggers 5 125 TRIGger BTRigger Queries all condition B settings 5 125 TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel of 5 126 BIT lt x gt condition B TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of 5 126 SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt the specified logic channel of condition B TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic 5 126 CONDition channel of condition B
261. ill be saved for 5 79 TALL Trace A11 a specific type of data FILE SAVE ASCii INTerval Sets or queries the data removal interval that is used when saving data in 5 79 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii TINFormation Sets or queries whether time information is included when saving data in 5 79 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii DPOint Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving data in 5 79 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel Sets or queries the writing method of sub channel data when saving data in 5 79 ASCII format FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension Sets or queries the file name extension that is used when saving data in 5 79 ASCII format FILE SAVE BINary COMPression Sets or queries whether waveform data is compressed during saving 5 79 FILE SAVE COMMent Sets or queries the comment that will be saved 5 79 FILE SAVE NAME Sets or queries the name of the file that will be saved 5 79 5 12 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page GONogo Group GONogo Queries all GO NO GO determination settings 5 80 GONogo ACONdition Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination action condition 5 80 GONogo ACTion Queries all settings for the action that is performed when the condition is met 5 80 and the settings for the condition itself GONogo ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded when the condition is met 5 80 GONogo ACTion HCOPy HardCOPY Sets or queries
262. ings of an installed frequency module 5 40 CHANnel x FREQ SETup Sets or queries the center frequency of an installed frequency module 5 40 CFRequency CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup Sets or queries whether deceleration prediction is turned on for an installed 5 40 DECeleration frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup DPULse Sets or queries the distance per pulse of an installed frequency module 5 40 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the filter settings of an installed frequency module 5 40 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the smoothing settings of an installed frequency module 5 41 SMOothing CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries whether smoothing is turned on for an installed frequency 5 41 SMOothing MODE module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries the moving average order of smoothing of an installed 5 41 SMOothing VALue frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Queries all the pulse averaging settings of an installed frequency module 5 41 PAVerage CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries whether pulse averaging is turned on for an installed 5 41 PAVerage MODE frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer Sets or queries the number of pulses to average over for an installed 5 41 PAVerage VALue frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FUNCtion Sets or queries the measurement mode of an installed frequency module
263. installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain INVert Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT ON CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN INVERT 1 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale CHANnel x STRain LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient B that is o used during linear scaling for an installed strain 3 module 3 D Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale 2 BVALue NRf CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NR gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be
264. ion Queries the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt Function Queries all AY display settings AY is between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt x 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt STATe R lt x gt 1 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DY lt y gt VALue Function Queries the AY value between the FFT cursors marker cursors Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue x 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DY2 VALUE 3 9750000E 00 Example CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt POSition Function Sets or queries the position of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt POSition Example M1 POSITION 3 00
265. ion jump width also referred to as the sync jump width Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SJW lt NRf gt lt x gt 13 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 4 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW 1 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SJW 1 Description When the sample point is set to 85 the DL850 DL850V will not operate if lt NRf gt is set to 4 In this case the DL850 DL850V will operate if lt NRf gt is set to 3 Even if you change the sample point setting the SJW setting does not change Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint Function Sets or queries the sample point for each bit of a CAN bus signal port Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT SPOint lt NRf gt lt x gt 13 to 16 lt NRf gt 71 78 or 85 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT 71 CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT SPOINT 71 Description This command is valid when the CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT BRATe command is set to MANual Example CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator Function Sets or queries whether the 124 O terminator between CAN H and CAN L on the CAN bus line is ON or OFF Syntax CHANnel x CAN PORT TERMinator Boolean x 13 to 16 Example CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR ON CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR gt CHANNEL13 CAN PORT TERMINATOR 1 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Function Queries all the settings of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt
266. ion jump width also referred to as the 5 34 jump width sync jump width CHANnel x CAN PORT SPOint Sets or queries the sample point for each bit of a CAN bus signal port 5 34 5 2 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt CAN PORT TERMinator Sets or queries whether the 124 O terminator between CAN H and CAN L 5 34 on the CAN bus line is ON or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt Queries all the settings of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module 5 34 CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt INPut Sets or queries whether a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module is ON 5 35 or OFF CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MFORmat Sets or queries the message format of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 35 module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt MID CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SBIT Start BIT Sets or queries the message ID of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 35 module Sets or queries the bit number of the starting position of a sub channel ona 5 35 CAN bus monitor module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BICount Bit Count Sets or queries the bit length of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor 5 35 module CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt BORDer Byte Order Sets or queries the endianness used to save to internal memory the data of 5 35 a sub channel on a CAN bus module
267. irat c fend 5 77 5 14 GONoOJgO Group cree trek ede oet tern ee Sa dea ed eed Lae naval 5 80 EL ME esci 5 85 5 16 HISTORY Group 5 86 517 IMAGE GROUD itecto coieteide meet duis iiec tiui eto E Ea a EE ELETE 5 89 5 19 INlFTialize Group iex dede exe re ete ree ah ode ee e a 5 90 IM DL850 17EN Contents Chapter 6 Appendix Index 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 5 37 5 38 LS Tart Grou C neta 5 91 MATH GEOUD ieitri i toe tet ee Meet tet eeu na i etu 5 92 Mss m 5 97 Wlen Degere e E M 5 104 Vlsternciom 5 106 pie lepep 5 107 SEARCH Group 5 ent edite reed vei iid ees 5 108 ShiHeciei ee 5 111 99 Tart Cio 5 112 AP Reo MM 5 113 STATUS Group a 5c eet hee ce i tee dne e il eire in bens 5 114 telo ase 5 115 Spe ciem 5 116 SEXIES e 5 117 TIMebase GrOUp rtt rti nete d bitu utn 5 121 HejrEc 5 122 WAV 2 TOniti GROUP aaes seus 5 133 Po deli m
268. is the same as the MONitor ASENd command Description The data that is present at the time when you execute the latch command is sent If the latch command has not been executed an undefined value is returned MONitor LATCh ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel Syntax MONitor LATCh ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 S c CHannel lt x gt s x 1 to 16 sub hannel MONITOR LATCH ASEND CHANNEL1 gt The response format is the same as the MONitor ASENd CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt command pueululo 2 Example Description The data that is present at the time when you execute the latch command is sent If the latch command has not been executed an undefined value is returned MONitor LATCh EXECute Function Latches the monitor data Syntax MONitor LATCh EXECute MONitor LATCh SEND ALI CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt Function Sends numeric monitor data Syntax MONitor LATCh SEND ALL CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel MON LATCh SEND CHAN1 gt 9 9 digit number of bytes data byte Example sequence Description The data that is present at the time when you execute the latch command is sent IM DL850 17EN 5 105
269. it This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the standard event register and its corresponding event register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when a certain event takes place inside the instrument For details See page 6 4 Bit 6 RQS Request Service MSS Master Status Summary This bit is 1 when the logical AND of the status byte excluding bit 6 and the service request enable register is 1 In other words this bit is set to 1 when the instrument requests service from the controller RQS is set to 1 when the MSS bit changes from 0 to 1 and is cleared when serial polling is carried out or when the MSS bit changes to O Bit Masking To mask a bit in the status byte so that it does not trigger an SRQ set the corresponding bit of the service request enable register to zero For example to mask bit 2 EAV so that service is not requested when an error occurs set bit 2 of the service request enable register to O Do this using the SRE command To query whether each bit of the service request enable register is 1 or 0 use SRE For details on the SRE command see chapter 5 Status Byte Operation A service request is issued when bit 6 in the status byte becomes 1 Bit 6 is set to 1 when any other bit becomes 1 when the corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 For example if an event occurs and the logical AND of a standard event register b
270. it and its corresponding enable register bit is 1 then bit 5 ESB is set to 1 At this point if bit 5 of the service request enable register is 1 bit 6 MSS is set to 1 and the DL850 DL850V requests service from the controller You can check what type of event occurred by reading the contents of the status byte Reading the Status Byte There are two ways to read the contents of the status byte STB Query Bit 6 functions as MSS when a query is made using STB This causes the MSS to be read This query does not cause any of the status byte bits to be cleared after the status byte is read Serial Polling Serial polling causes bit 6 to function as an RQS bit This causes the RQS to be read After the status byte is read only the RQS bit is cleared You cannot read the MSS bit when serial polling is used Clearing the Status Byte There is no way to clear all of the bits in the status byte The bits that are cleared vary for each operation as follows STB Query None of the bits are cleared Serial Polling Only the RQS bit is cleared A CLS command is received When a CLS command is received the status byte itself is not cleared but the contents of the standard event register which affect the bits in the status byte are cleared As a result the corresponding status byte bits are cleared Because the output queue is not cleared with a CLS command bit 4 MAV in the status byte is not affected However
271. l be 10 ns TRIGGER DELAY 0 001 TRIGGER DELAY gt TRIGGER DELAY 1 0000000E 03 Description When the DL850 DL850V is using an external clock the delay is fixed to 0 Example TRIGger EOA Function Queries all EdgeOnA settings Syntax TRIGger EOA 5 126 IM DL850 17EN 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger BOA CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 BIT lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt CHAN x s x 1 to 16 BIT lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries
272. l be rounded Voltage Time lt Frequency gt Current Voltage Time Frequency and Current indicate decimal values that have physical significance A lt Multiplier gt or Unit can be attached to the lt NRf gt form that was described earlier The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt lt Unit gt 5MV lt NRf gt lt Unit gt 5E 3V lt NRf gt lt Multiplier gt 5M lt NRf gt 5E 3 lt Multiplier gt lt Multipliers gt that you can use are indicated in the following table Symbol Word Multiplier EX Exa 1018 PE Peta 1015 T Tera 1012 G Giga 109 MA Mega 108 K Kilo 103 M Milli 103 U Micro 10 9 N Nano 10 P Pico 10 12 F Femto 10715 A Atto 10 718 Unit Units that you can use are indicated in the following table Symbol Word Description V Volt Voltage S Second Time HZ Hertz Frequency MHZ Megahertz Frequency A Ampere Current lt Multiplier gt and Unit are not case sensitive e U is used to indicate micro pu MA is used for Mega to distinguish it from Milli Megahertz which is expressed as MHZ is an exception Therefore M Milli cannot be used for frequencies If both Multiplier and Unit are omitted the default unit is used Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR3 gt form Response messages are returned using the default unit without the lt M
273. lay SDGRoup lt NRf gt 1 to 4 DISPLAY SDGROUP 1 DISPLAY SDGROUP DISPLAY SDGROUP 1 Example IM DL850 17EN 5 71 pueululo 2 5 10 DISPlay Group DISPlay MAPPing Function Sets or queries the waveform mapping mode for when the display format is set to an option other than 1 Syntax DISPlay MAPPing AUTO USERdefine DISPlay MAPPing Example DISPLAY MAPPING USERDEFINE DISPLAY MAPPING gt DISPLAY MAPPING USERDEFINE DISPlay SVALue Scale VALUE Function Sets or queries whether scale values are displayed Syntax DISPlay SVALue Boolean DISPlay SVALue Example DISPLAY SVALUE ON DISPLAY SVALUE DISPLAY SVALUE 1 DISPlay TLABel Trace LABEL Function Sets or queries whether waveform labels are displayed Syntax DISPlay TLABel lt Boolean gt DISPlay TLABel Example DISPLAY TLABEL ON DISPLAY TLABEL DISPLAY TLABEL 1 DISPlay LINDicator Level Indicator Function Sets or queries whether the right indicator on the TY waveform display is displayed Syntax DISPlay LINDicator Boolean DISPlay LINDicator Example DISPLAY LINDICATOR ON DISPLAY LINDICATOR gt DISPLAY LINDICATOR 1 DISPlay MODE EKEY Esc Key Function Switches the screen display mode This command causes the DL850 DL850V to perform the same action as if its front panel ESC key had been pressed Syntax DISPlay MODE EKEY Example DISPLAY MODE EKEY 5 72
274. lean gt CHANnel lt x gt DISPlay lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL1 DISPLAY 1 CHANNEL1 DISPLAY gt CHANNEL1 DISPLAY 1 Description Error 241 Hardware missing will occur if there is no module installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x gt FREQ Function Queries all the settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut Function Queries all the input settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth Function Sets or queries the input signal bandwidth limit of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth FULL lt Frequency gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut BWIDth lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Frequency gt 100Hz 1kHz 10kHz 100kHz If Preset is set to AC200V or AC100V you cannot select FULL CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH gt CHANNEL1 FREQ INPUT BWIDTH FULL Example CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut CELimination Function Sets or queries the input signal chattering elimination of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut puewwoy CELimination lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INPut CELimination lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt 0 to 1000ms Example CHANNEL1 FR
275. les installed in them SYSTem LOGic BORDer Bit Order Function Sets or queries the bit order that is used when you display logic module data as waveforms Syntax SYSTem LOGic BORDer LSBFirst MSBFirst SYSTem LOGic BORDer Example SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER LSBFIRST SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER gt SYSTEM LOGIC BORDER LSBFIRST Description This setting is applied to all channels that have modules installed in them IM DL850 17EN 5 119 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem MLANguage Function Sets or queries the menu language Syntax SYSTem MLANguage CHINese ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian JAPANese KORean SPANish SYSTem MLANguage SYSTEM MLANGUAGE ENGLISH SYSTEM MLANGUAGE SYSTEM MLANGUAGE ENGLISH Example SYSTem OVERview Function Displays the system information Syntax SYSTem OVERView Example SYSTEM OVERVIEW SYSTem PACTion Function Sets or queries whether the action on trigger mode will be enabled when the DL850 DL850V turns on ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem PACTion Boolean SYSTem PACTion Example SYSTEM PACTION ON SYSTEM PACTION gt SYSTEM PACTION 1 SYSTem PSTart Function Sets or queries whether waveform acquisition will be started when the DL850 DL850V turns on ON or not OFF Syntax SYSTem PSTart Boolean SYSTem PSTart SYSTEM PSTART ON SYSTEM PSTART SYSTEM PSTART 1 Example SYSTem RCMode Remote Control Mode Function Sets or qu
276. log voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage INVert lt Boolean gt CHANnel x VOLTage INVert x to 16 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT ON CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT gt CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE INVERT 1 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Function Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AVALue Function Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale AVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E430 Example CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE CHANNEL2 VOLTAGE LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 5 48 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale BVALue lt x gt 1 to 16 NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9
277. ls on how to use the WAI command to synchronize the DL850 DL850V see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command 5 142 IM DL850 17EN Chapter 6 Status Reports 6 1 About Status Reports Status Reports The figure below shows the format of status reports that are read by serial polling This status report format is an extended version of the status report format defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 86 95 4 39 2 1 O Service request enable De H register OR i i t I 4 MSS 7 6 ESBIMAV EES EAV 1 0 Status byte RQS A K A Y Service request occurrence Output Error o L queue queue 2 o z 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Standard event enable i i o pe i register a tg tg OR A i Ld ty t A 7 6 5 4 3 241 0 Standard event register 15 14 13 12 11 1019 8 7 6 5 4 83 24 1 0 Extended event enable H register A t g Np S t A OR NS _4 ty ee i g Ld A 15 14 13 12
278. meric monitor data in ASCII format of all channels 5 104 MONitor ASENd CHANnel x Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel 5 104 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor BITS CHANnel lt x gt Queries the effective bit length of the specified channel s data 5 104 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor BYTeorder Sets or queries the transmission byte order for data formats that are 2 bytes 5 104 or longer MONitor FORMat CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the transmission data format 5 104 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor OFFSet CHANnel lt x gt Queries the offset that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 104 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor GAIN CHANnel lt x gt Queries the gain that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 104 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor RANGe CHANnel lt x gt Queries the range that is used when the specified channel s numeric monitor 5 105 SCHannel lt x gt data is converted to a physical value MONitor SEND ALL Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format 5 105 MONitor SEND CHANnel lt x gt Sends the numeric monitor data in binary format of the specified channel 5 105 SCHannel lt x gt MONitor VERBose Set whether to include labels and units in the response to the MONitor 5 105 ASENd command MONitor LATCh ASENd Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII forma
279. n Sets or queries whether the date and time are set manually or by using SNTP Syntax SYSTem CLOCk TYPE MANual SNTP SYSTem CLOCk TYPE SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE SYSTEM CLOCK TYPE MANUAL Example IM DL850 17EN 5 117 5 32 SYSTem Group SYSTem IRIG Function Queries all IRIG settings Syntax SYSTem IRIG SYSTem IRIG FORMat Function Sets or queries the IRIG format for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG FORMat A B SYSTem IRIG FORMat Example SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT A SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT gt SYSTEM IRIG FORMAT A Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem IRIG MODulation Function Sets or queries the IRIG modulation type for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG MODulation AM PWCode SYSTem IRIG MODulation Example SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION AM SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION gt SYSTEM IRIG MODULATION AM Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem IRIG IMPedance Function Sets or queries the input impedance for synchronizing the time through IRIG signals Syntax SYSTem IRIG IMPedance lt NRf gt SYSTem IRIG IMPedance lt NRf gt 50 or 5000 Example SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE 50 SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE gt SYSTEM IRIG IMPEDANCE 50 Description This command is valid on models with the C20 option SYSTem KEYResponse Fu
280. n of the specified overlap command OPC OPC For details on how to use the OPC command to synchronize the DL850 DL850V see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command f OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed Returns ASCII code 1 when the specified overlap command is completed OPC ORC gt 1 For details on how to use the OPC command to synchronize the DL850 DL850V see page 4 8 The COMMunicate OPSE command is used to specify the overlap command If OPC is not the last command of the message its operation is not guaranteed IM DL850 17EN 5 141 pueululo 2 5 38 Common Command Group OPT Function Syntax Example Queries the installed options OPT OPT 250MW HD PROBEPOWER Description This command returns the size of waveform RST Function Syntax Example memory and whether the printer hard disk interface gt lt GPIB gt lt IRIG gt lt user defined computation gt and lt probe power supply output gt options are installed Size of waveform memory The total size of waveform data memory 250MW when the total size is 250 Mpoint 1GW when the total size is 1 Gpoint 2GW when the total size is 2 Gpoint Printer PRINTER Hard disk interface HD or EHD GPIB GPIB IRIG IRIG User defined computations USERDEFINE
281. n the display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit AUTO NONE PICO NANO MICRo MILI KILO MEGA GIGA TERA CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Kx to 16 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE SUBUNIT AUTO CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale GETMeasure Function Executes the measurement of the linear scaling P1X or P2X value of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale GETMeasure P1X P2X lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel1 STRAIN LSCale GETMeasure P1X Example CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE Function Sets or queries the linear scale mode of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE AXB OFF P12 SHUNt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale MODE SHUNt can only be set when the installed module is a 701271 Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE OFF CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN LSCALE MODE OFF CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y Function Sets or queries the linear scaling P1X P1Y P2X or P2Y value of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale P1X P1Y P2X P2Y lt x gt 1 to 16
282. nable register to be set to 11111011 In this case bit 2 of the standard event register is disabled This means that bit 5 ESB of the status byte register is not set to 1 even if a query error occurs The default value is ESE 0 all bits disabled Aquery using ESE will not clear the contents of the standard event enable register For information about the standard event enable register see page 6 3 ESR Function Syntax Example Description IDN Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax Example Description OPC Function Syntax Example Description Queries and clears the standard event register ESR ESR gt 32 This command returns a sum of the values of each bit in decimal format When an SRQ is sent you can check what types of events have occurred For example if a value of 32 is returned this indicates that the standard event register is set to 00100000 This means that the SRQ occurred due to a command syntax error Aquery using ESR will clear the contents of the standard event register For information about the standard event register see page 6 3 Queries the DL850 DL850V model IDN IDN gt YOKOGAWA DL850 0 F0 10 This command returns a string in the following format lt Manufacturer gt lt Model gt lt Serial no gt lt Firmware version gt Sets bit 0 the OPC bit of the standard event register to 1 upon the completio
283. nction Sets or queries the response time of the START STOP key Syntax SYSTem KEYResponse QUICK SEC1 SYSTem KEYResponse Example SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE SEC1 SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE SYSTEM KEYRESPONSE SECI SYSTem KEYProtect Function Queries all key lock settings Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Function Sets or queries whether the keys are locked Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect MODE lt Boolean gt SYSTem KEYProtect MODE Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE ON SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE SYSTEM KEYPROTECT MODE 1 Description The key lock status is retained even when the DL850 DL850V is restarted SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Function Sets or queries which keys will be locked Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE ALL ESTart SYSTem KEYProtect TYPE Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE ESTART SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE SYSTEM KEYPROTECT TYPE ESTART SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Release TYPe Function Sets or queries how to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe KEY PASSword SYSTem KEYProtect RTYPe Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE PASSWORD SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE gt SYSTEM KEYPROTECT RTYPE PASSWORD SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword Enter password Function Enters the password to release the key lock Syntax SYSTem KEYProtect EPASsword String String Up to 8 characters Example SYSTEM KEYPROTECT EPASSWORD ABC Description This command is valid wh
284. nd group are being concatenated Example ACQuire MODE NORMal PMT ACQuire COUNt 1 lt PMT gt IM DL850 17EN 4 2 Commands Upper Level Query An upper level query is a query that is made by appending a question mark to the highest level command of a group The controller can receive all of the settings in a group collectively by executing an upper level query Some upper level queries of a group which may be comprised of more than three hierarchical levels can cause the DL850 DL850V to transmit all the lower level settings Example CHANnell PMT gt CHANNELI DISPLAY ON LABEL CH1 COUPLING DC POSITION 0 00 PROBE 10 VDIV 50 0E 00 BWIDTH FULL OFFSET 0 0E 00 LSCALE MODE 0 The response to an upper level query can be sent back to the DL850 DL850V as a program message This enables the settings that were present when the upper level query was made to be reproduced later on However some upper level queries do not return setup data that is not currently in use Exercise caution because not all of a group s information is necessarily returned in a response Header Interpretation Rules The DL850 DL850V interprets the header that it receives according to the rules below Mnemonics are not case sensitive Example CURSor can be written as cursor or Cursor The lower case characters can be omitted Example CURSor can be written as CURSO or CURS The question
285. nd on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW TRIGger BTRigger CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition CHAN lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 sub channel Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Function Sets or queries the achievement condition of condition B Syntax TRIGger BTRigger CONDition ENTer EXIT TRIGger BTRigger CONDition Example TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION ENTER TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION gt TRIGGER BTRIGGER CONDITION ENTER Description This command is valid when the trigger type is ABN or ADB TRIGger DELay Function Sets or queries the delay Syntax TRIGger DELay lt Time gt TRIGger DELay lt Time gt 0 to 10s the resolution varies depending on the sample rate 1 sample rate x 1 10 The minimum resolution is 10 ns If the sample rate is higher than 10 MS s the resolution wil
286. ndition 5 82 is met GONogo ACTion SAVE PATH Queries the path on the storage medium that waveform data is saved to 5 82 when the condition is met GONogo ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the file format that waveforms are saved as on the storage 5 82 medium when the condition is met GONogo COUNt Queries the number of GO NO GO determinations that were performed 5 82 GONogo LOGic Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination logic 5 82 GONogo MODE Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination mode 5 82 GONogo NGCount Queries the GO NO GO determination NO GO count 5 82 GONogo PARameter Queries all parameter determination settings 5 82 GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries all settings for the specified waveform parameter for parameter 5 82 determination GONogo PARameter ITEM lt x gt Queries whether the specified waveform parameter for parameter 5 82 CAUSe determination is the cause of a NO GO judgment E J GONogo PARameter ITEM x MODE Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s reference condition for 5 82 parameter determination EM lt x gt TRACe Sets or queries the specified waveform parameter s source waveform for 5 83 parameter determination EM lt x gt TYPE Queries for parameter determination the specified waveform parameters 5 83 measurement item and upper and lower limits a j GONogo PARameter B J GONogo PARameter
287. ne of the capture actions 5 29 CAPTure ACTion MAIL Queries all dual capture action e mail transmission settings 5 29 CAPTure ACTion MAIL COUNt Sets or queries the upper limit of e mail transmissions to perform as a 5 29 capture action CAPTure ACTion MAIL MODE Sets or queries whether e mail is transmitted as a capture action 5 29 CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto file naming method 5 29 CAPTure ACTion SAVE Queries all dual capture action data save settings 5 29 CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE Sets or queries whether captured data is saved to a storage medium as a 5 29 capture action CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME Sets or queries the file name that is used when captured data is saved toa 5 29 storage medium CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Sets the current directory on the storage medium where the screen capture 5 29 is saved to as a capture action CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE Sets or queries the data format that is used when captured data is saved to 5 30 a storage medium CAPTure BITDisp Sets or queries whether captured event waveforms are displayed 5 30 CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Queries the largest number of the captured waveforms 5 30 CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Queries the smallest number of the captured waveforms 5 30 CAPTure FORMat Sets or queries the display format of the capture window 5 30 IM DL850 17EN 5 1 5 1 List of Commands Command Functi
288. nel 5 47 can measure temperature CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when temperature 5 47 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth Sets or queries the bandwidth limit that is used when temperature 5 47 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed module that can 5 47 COUPling measure temperature CHANnel x TEMPerature RJC Sets or queries the RJC that is used when temperature measurements are 5 47 performed CHANnel x TEMPerature SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen that are used when 5 47 temperature measurements are performed CHANnel x TEMPerature TYPE Sets or queries the thermocouple type that is used when temperature 5 47 measurements are performed CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT Sets or queries the unit that is used when temperature measurements are 5 48 performed CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Queries all settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage 5 48 measurements CHANnel x VOLTage BWIDth Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed module that can perform 5 48 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage COUPling Sets or queries the input coupling of an installed module that can perform 5 48 analog voltage measurements CHANnel x VOLTage INVert Sets or queries whether the display i
289. ngle bus When connecting multiple devices you must assign a unique address to each device Use cables that are 2 m or shorter in length to connect devices Keep the total length of the cables under 20 m When devices are communicating have at least two thirds of the devices on the bus turned on To connect multiple devices use a star or daisy chain configuration as shown below Loop and parallel configurations are not allowed IM DL850 17EN 3 2 Connecting GP IB Cables Optional CAUTION Be sure to turn off the PC and the DL850 DL850V when connecting or removing communication cables Otherwise erroneous operation may result or the internal circuitry may break IM DL850 17EN 3 3 jieuondo e ejie31u gr d9 B 3 3 GP IB Interface Features GP IB Interface Features Listener Capabilities Allows you to specify the same DL850 DL850V settings that you can using the front panel keys You cannot turn the power on and off or change communication settings Receives output requests for measured and computed data panel setting data and error codes Receives status report commands and other commands Talker Capabilities The DL850 DL850V can transmit measured and computed data The DL850 DL850V can transmit panel setting data and the status byte The DL850 DL850V can transmit error codes when errors occur Note Talk onl
290. nication Interface this manual The manual explains the DL850 DL850V User s Manual communication interface features and instructions on how to use them Notes The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from those that actually appear on your screen Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the documents concerning it have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California Trademarks Microsoft Internet Explorer MS DOS Windows Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated GIGAZoom ENGINE is a registered trademark of YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation e In this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark or registered tra
291. nt item Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK STATE 0 Description This command returns the same response as the MEAS CHAN lt Parameter gt STAT command MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt COUNt Function Queries the count of measured values for cyclic statistical processing of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH x Parameter COUNt Parameter AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDthl BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK COUNT gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK COUNT 3 5 100 IM DL850 17EN 5 21 MEASure Group MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt MAXimum MEAN M INimum
292. ntains lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or 4 6 lt Frequency gt 134 Suffix too long Check the units where the syntax contains lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or 4 6 lt Frequency gt 138 Suffix not allowed Units of measurement can only be used where the syntax contains 4 6 lt Voltage gt lt Time gt or lt Frequency gt 141 Invalid character data Be sure to select one of the listed choices when the syntax Chapters 4 contains and 5 144 Character data too long Check the spelling of the strings when the syntax contains Chapter 5 148 Character data not allowed Use a data type other than lt String gt Chapter 5 150 String data error Enclose parameters with single or double quotation marks where 4 7 the syntax contains lt String gt 151 Invalid string data The parameter is either too long or it contains an unusable Chapter 5 character 158 String data not allowed Use a data type other than lt String gt Chapter 5 161 Invalid block data lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 168 Block data not allowed lt Block data gt cannot be used 4 7 and chapter 5 App 2 IM DL850 17EN Appendix 2 Error Messages Code Message Corrective Action Page 171 Missing Right Mathematical operations cannot be used 172 Invalid expression Mathematical operations cannot be used Chapter 5 178 Expression data not allowed Mathematical operations cannot be used Chapt
293. ntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain SCALe lt NRf gt 15 0000 to 15 0000 when the unit is mV or V 30000 to 30000 when the unit is pSTR 9 9999E430 to 9 9999E430 during linear scaling Example CHANNEL5 STRAIN SCALE 5000 5000 CHANNEL5 STRAIN SCALE gt CHANNEL5 STRAIN SCALE 5 000000E 03 5 000000E 03 CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit of an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT MV USTR CHANnel lt x gt STRain UNIT Example CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT USTR CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT gt CHANNEL11 STRAIN UNIT USTR CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature Function Queries all the settings of a module if the module in the specified channel can measure temperature Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout Function Sets or queries whether burnout will be detected when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BURNout lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT ON CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE BURNOUT 1 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth Function Sets or queries the bandwidth limit that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature BWIDth AUTO FULL lt Frequency gt
294. ntax CURSor XY HORizontal DY CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe Boolean CURSor XY HORizontal DY STATe CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE ON CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY STATE 1 Example CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue Function Queries the AY axis value between the H cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal DY VALue CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL DY VALUE 300 00000E 00 Example CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries H cursor positions on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor XY HORizontal POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 lt NRf gt 5 to 5 in steps of 1 100 Example CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION1 3 CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION1 gt CURSOR XY HORIZONTAL POSITION1 3 00 Description You can query cursor position information for cursors XY1 to XY8 Use the CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe command to specify the waveform that you want to query O CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the H cursors on the X Y display Syntax CURSor XY HORizontal TRACe XY1 XY2 XY3 XY4 XY5 X
295. ntax MEASure HISTory ABORt Example MEASURE HISTORY ABORT MEASure HISTory EXECute Function Executes the statistical processing of history waveforms Syntax MEASure HISTory EXECute Example MEASURE HISTORY EXECUTE MEASure MODE Function Sets or queries the measure mode Syntax MEASure MODE OFF ON CYCLe HISTory STATistics MEASure MODE Example MEASURE MODE ON MEASURE MODE gt MEASURE MODE ON MEASure ONECycle Function Sets or queries whether one cycle mode is ON or OFF Syntax MEASure ONECycle lt Boolean gt MEASure ONECycle Example MEASURE ONECYCLE ON MEASURE ONECYCLE gt MEASURE ONECYCLE 1 MEASure TRANge Time Range Function Sets or queries the waveform parameter measurement range Syntax MEASure TRANge NRf NRf MEASure TRANge lt NRf gt 5 to 5 div in 10 div display record length steps Example MEASURE TRANGE 5 5 MEASURE TRANGE gt MEASURE TRANGE 5 000000000000 5 000000000000 MEASure WAIT Function Waits for the completion of measurement by using a timeout valuer Syntax MEASure WAIT NRf lt NRf gt 1 to 36000 timeout value in units of 100 msec Example MEASure WAIT 100 MEAS WAIT 1 Description The command returns 0 if the measurement finishes within the specified timeout If measurement does not finish or if it was never taking place to begin with the command returns 1 Even if you make the timeout value long
296. ode 5 95 MATH lt x gt SCALe VALue Sets or queries a set of upper and lower limits for manual scaling 5 95 MATH lt x gt SHIFt CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the amount of phase shift in the Shift computation when the 5 95 SCHannel lt x gt TIME internal clock is used MATH lt x gt UNIT Sets or queries a unit string that is attached to computation results 5 96 IM DL850 17EN spueululo2 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MEASure Group MEASure Queries all the settings for automated measurement of waveform 5 97 parameters MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether all the waveform parameters of the specified 5 97 SCHannel lt x gt channel are ON or OFF MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets all the measurement items of the specified channel to ON or OFF 5 97 SCHannel lt x gt ALL MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries whether the copy destination channel is ON or OFF for when 5 97 SCHannel lt x gt CDEStination parameter measurement items are copied between channels CopyDestination MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Copies all the measurement item ON OFF settings from one specified 5 97 SCHannel lt x gt COPY channel to another specified channel MEASure CHANnel lt x gt Queries all delay settings 5 97 SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DEL
297. of the main window Syntax ZOOM ASCRol1 JUMP LEFT RIGHt Example ZOOM ASCROLL JUMP RIGHT ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed Function Sets or queries the auto scroll speed of the zoom box Syntax Z00M ASCRoll SPEed NRf ZOOM ASCRo11 SPEed lt NRf gt 1 to 10 Example ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED 5 ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED gt ZOOM ASCROLL SPEED 5 ZOOM ASCRo11 STARt Function Starts auto scrolling Syntax Z00M ASCROll STARt LEFT RIGHt Example ZOOM ASCROLL STAR LEFT ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Function Stops auto scrolling Syntax ZOOM ASCRo11 STOP Example ZOOM ASCROLL STOP ZOOM ASCRo11 TARGet Function Sets or queries the zoom window that will be auto scrolled Syntax ZOOM ASCRoll TARGet Z1 Z2 ZOOM ASCRo11 TARGet Example ZOOM ASCROLL TARGET Z1 Z200M ASCROLL TARGET gt ZOOM ASCROLL TARGET Z1 ZOOM FORMat lt x gt Function Sets or queries the display format of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM FORMat lt x gt MAIN NRf ZOOM FORMat lt x gt NRf 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 x 1 2 sets the target zoom box ZOOM FORMAT1 1 Z00M FORMAT1 gt ZOOM FORMAT1 1 Example ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt Function Queries all settings related to the specified group display of zoom waveforms Syntax ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Sets or queries whether the specified source waveform of the specified group dis
298. off TIME Function Sets or queries the hold off time Syntax TRIGger HOLDoff TIME lt Time gt TRIGger HOLDoff TIME lt Time gt 0 to 10s the resolution is 10 ns Example TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME 0 001 TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME gt TRIGGER HOLDOFF TIME 1 0000000E 03 TRIGger MODE Function Sets or queries the trigger mode Syntax TRIGger MODE AUTO ALEVel NORMal1 SINGle NSINgle ONSTart TRIGger MODE TRIGGER MODE AUTO TRIGGER MODE TRIGGER MODE AUTO Example IM DL850 17EN 5 127 5 34 TRIGger Group TRIGger OR Function Queries all OR trigger settings Syntax TRIGger OR TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL9 BIT1 RISE Example TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt BIT lt x gt TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the s
299. ogram message including the lt PMT gt is kept below 1024 bytes Program messages that do not contain queries never cause deadlocks 4 2 IM DL850 17EN 4 2 Commands Commands There are three types of commands program headers that a controller may send to the DL850 DL850V The commands differ in their program header formats Common Command Header Commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1987 are called common commands The header format of a common command is shown below Be sure to include an asterisk at the beginning of a common command SUR L D s d Common command example CLS Compound Header Other commands that are specific to the DL850 DL850V are classified and arranged in a hierarchy according to their functions The compound header syntax is shown below Be sure to use a colon to specify a lower hierarchical level lt Mnemonic gt Compound header example ACQuire MODE Simple Header These commands are functionally independent and are not contained within a hierarchy The format of a simple header is shown below lt Mnemonic gt e Simple header example STARt Note A lt mnemonic gt is an alphanumeric character string When Concatenating Commands Command Groups A command group is a group of commands that have common compound headers arranged in a hierarchy A command group may contain sub groups Example Group of commands related
300. on lt NRf gt 5 to 5div Example CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION 0 CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION gt CAPTURE WINDOW POSITION 0 000000000000 IM DL850 17EN 5 31 puewwoy 5 6 CHANnel Group The commands in this group deal with a channel s vertical axis You can make the same settings and queries that you can by using the VERTICAL group keys CH and V DIV keys on the front panel CHANnel lt x gt Function Queries all vertical axis settings of a channel Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CHANnel lt x gt ACCL Function Queries all the settings of an installed acceleration voltage module lt x gt 1 to 16 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS Function Sets or queries whether the bias current supply to the acceleration sensors of an installed acceleration voltage module is on Syntax CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS Boolean CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS x to 16 Example CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS ON CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS gt CHANNEL1 ACCL BIAS 1 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BWIDth Function Sets or queries the filter when the input coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration Syntax CHANnel x ACCL BWIDth FULL AUTO Frequency CHANnel x ACCL BWIDth x to 16 Frequency 4kHz 400Hz 40Hz Example CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH FULL CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH gt CHANNEL1 ACCL BWIDTH FULL CHANnel lt x gt ACCL COUPling Function Sets or
301. on Page CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt Queries all group display settings of the capture window 5 30 CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Sets or queries the displayed waveform in the specified group display of the 5 30 capture window CAPTure MCMode Main Capture Sets or queries the main capture mode during dual capture 5 30 Mode CAPTure MODE Sets or queries whether the dual capture mode is enabled 5 30 CAPTure RLENgth Sets or queries the dual capture length 5 30 CAPTure TDIV Sets or queries the dual capture T DIV setting 5 31 CAPTure WINDow Queries all dual capture display window settings 5 31 CAPTure WINDow MAG Sets or queries the dual capture window zoom factor as a time 5 31 CAPTure WINDow MODE Sets or queries whether the dual capture window is turned on 5 31 CAPTure WINDow CAPNum Sets or queries the number of the waveform that is displayed in the dual 5 31 capture window CAPTure WINDow POSition Sets or queries the dual capture window horizontal position 5 31 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt Queries all vertical axis settings of a channel 5 32 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL Queries all the settings of an installed acceleration voltage module 5 32 CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BIAS Sets or queries whether the bias current supply to the acceleration sensors 5 32 of an installed acceleration voltage module is on CHANnel lt x gt ACCL BWIDth Sets or queries the filter
302. on Queries the path on the storage medium that a screen capture is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe PATH Example GONOGO ACTION IMAGE PATH gt GONOGO ACTION IMAGE PATH PATH USB UTIL GONogo ACTion MAIL Function Queries all settings for sending e mail when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL GONogo ACTion MATL COUNt Function Sets or queries the number of times that e mail is sent when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt GONogo ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 Example GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT gt GONOGO ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is sent when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Boolean GONogo ACTion MAIL MODE Example GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE ON GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE gt GONOGO ACTION MAIL MODE 1 GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether waveforms are saved to the storage medium when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Boolean GONogo ACTion SAVE MODE Example GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE ON GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE gt GONOGO ACTION SAVE MODE 1 GONogo ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory on the storage medium where waveform data is saved to when the condition is met Syntax GONogo AC
303. or TY DEGRee RVALue lt NRf gt 1 to 720 in steps of 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE 360 CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE RVALUE 360 Example CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe Function Syntax Example CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt Queries all measured value settings for an angle cursor on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt x 1 2 Function Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe Sets or queries whether the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display is displayed CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee Y lt x gt STATe x 1 2 CURSOR TY CURSOR TY CURSOR TY DEGREE Y1 STATE 1 Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the angle cursors on the T Y display CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe NRf NRf MATH x ALL CURSor TY DEGRee TRACe lt NRf gt to 16 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt to 16 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE TRACE 1 puewwoy Is pi Q REE Y1 STATE 1 REE Y1 STATE gt U Pi Q CURSor TY DEGRee YXx VALue Function Syntax Example Queries the measured value of an angle cursor on the T Y display CURSor
304. or queries the pulse rotate setting to use during external clock input 5 25 ACQuire RLENgth Sets or queries the record length 5 25 ACQuire RTOut Queries all hard disk recording settings 5 25 ACQuire RTOut ANAMing Sets or queries the hard disk recording auto naming feature 5 26 e ACQuire RTOut COMMent Sets or queries the hard disk recording comment 5 26 3 ACQuire RTOut FILename Sets or queries the hard disk recording file name 5 26 E ACQuire RTOut MODE Sets or queries whether hard disk recording is enabled 5 26 Q ACQuire RTOut DIVide MODE Sets or queries whether divided recording is enabled for hard disk recording 5 26 ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer Sets or queries the number of divisions when divided recording is performed 5 26 during hard disk recording ASETup Group ASETup Queries all auto setup settings 5 27 ASETup EXECute Executes auto setup 5 27 ASETup TARGet Sets or queries the channel to perform auto setup on 5 27 ASETup UNDO Undoes auto setup 5 27 CALibrate Group CALibrate Queries all calibration settings 5 28 CALibrate EXECute Executes calibration 5 28 CALibrate MODE Sets or queries the auto calibration mode 5 28 CAPTure Group CAPTure Queries all dual capture settings 5 29 CAPTure ACTion Queries all dual capture action settings 5 29 CAPTure ACTion BUZZer Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded as o
305. ory 5 77 Make Directory FILE DIRectory PATH Queries the current directory 5 78 FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP Aborts the loading of various types of data 5 78 ABORt FILE LOAD BINary SETup SNAP Executes the loading of various types of data This is an overlap command 5 78 EXECute FILE SAVE Queries all file name settings for saving files 5 78 FILE SAVE ANAMing Sets or queries the auto naming mode for saving files 5 78 FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Queries all the settings related to the saving of a specific type of file 5 78 9 FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Aborts the saving of a specific type of file 5 78 MEASure SETup SNAP ABORC FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Executes the saving of a specific type of file This is an overlap command 5 78 MEASure SETup SNAP EXECute FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries what waveforms the history memory feature will save fora 5 78 HISTory specific type of data FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the save range for a specific type of data 5 78 RANGe FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the cursor position for when data is to be saved using a 5 78 CRANge lt x gt cursor range FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the waveform that will be saved for a specific type of data 5 78 STRace CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt FILE SAVE ASCii BINary FLOat Sets or queries the selection method for the waveforms that w
306. oup MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as percentages Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal PERCent lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH x DPRoximal PERCent lt NRf gt 0 to 100 in 0 1 steps CHANnel lt x gt s x 1 to 16 SCHannel x s x 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt s x 1 to 8 The order is lt Proximal gt lt Mesial gt lt Distal gt Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL PERCENT 20 50 80 MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL PERCENT MEASURE CHANNEL1 DPROXIMAL PERCENT 20 0 50 0 80 0 MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT Function Sets or queries the distal mesial and proximal points as units Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Curre nt Current NRf NRf NRf MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt DPRoximal UNIT lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on settings such as the range and offset For details see the DL850 DL850V User s Manual CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 MATH lt x gt
307. pecified by the WAVeform TRACe command the 5 135 main waveform data WAVeform SIGN Queries whether signs are included in the block data of the source waveform 5 136 data specified by WAVeform TRACe when the data is queried WAVeform SRATe Sample RATE Queries the sample rate of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe 5 136 command WAVeform STARt Sets or queries the start data point in the waveform specified by the 5 136 WAVeform TRACe command the main waveform WAVeform TRACe Sets or queries the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to 5 136 WAVeform TRIGger Queries the trigger position of the record specified by the WAVeform 5 136 RECord command WAVeform TYPE Queries the acquisition mode of the source waveform 5 136 XY Group XY Queries all XY settings 5 137 XY CDISplay Combine Display Sets or queries whether to combine the displays of Window1 and Window2 5 137 on the XY waveform display XY DOTConnect Sets or queries whether dot connect is ON or OFF for XY waveforms 5 137 XY DECimation Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that XY waveforms 5 137 use XY MARKer Sets or queries whether XY pen markers are on 5 137 XY TCLear Trace Clear On Sets or queries whether the XY trace clear on start feature is on 5 137 Start IM DL850 17EN 5 23 spuewwog 5 1 List of Commands
308. play of zoom waveforms is displayed Syntax ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt Boolean gt ZOOM GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt xl 1 to 4 sets the group display lt x2 gt 1 to 64 sets the source waveform ZOOM GROUP1 TRACE1 1 ZOOM GROUP1 TRACE1 gt ZOOM GROUP1 TRACE1 1 Description ZOOM1 and ZOOM2 both reference the same setting Any changes made to the dual capture Example setting do not affect this setting nor do any changes made to this setting affect the dual capture setting IM DL850 17EN 5 139 puewwoy 5 37 ZOOM Group ZOOM MAG lt x gt Function Sets or queries the horizontal magnification of the specified zoom waveform Syntax ZOOM MAG lt x gt lt NRf gt ZOOM MAG lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 sets the target zoom box lt NRf gt 1 to 200000000 ZOOM MAG1 100 ZOOM MAG1 gt ZOOM MAG1 100 0 Description Use this command when the DL850 DL850V is using an external clock When the DL850 DL850V is using the internal clock use the ZOOM TDIV lt x gt command to set the magnification The magnification is set as a percentage Example ZOOM MAIN Function Sets or queries the proportion of the main waveform display area that is used when zooming waveforms Syntax ZOOM MAIN 20 50 OFF ZOOM MAIN Example ZOOM MAIN 20 ZOOM MAIN gt ZOOM MAIN 20 ZOOM MODE lt x gt Function Sets or queries whether the specified zoom wave
309. r Function Sets or queries the number of divisions when divided recording is performed during hard disk recording Syntax ACQuire RTOut DIVide NUMBer lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 10 20 50 100 Example ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER 10 ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER gt ACQUIRE RTOUT DIVIDE NUMBER 10 5 26 IM DL850 17EN 5 3 ASETup Group The commands in this group deal with auto setup You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the SETUP key on the front panel ASETup Function Queries all auto setup settings Syntax ASETup ASETup EXECute Function Executes auto setup Syntax ASETup EXECute Description Auto setup cannot be executed during hard disk recording ASETup TARGet Function Sets or queries the channel to perform auto setup on Syntax ASETup TARGet ALL NRf NRf lt NRf gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt If the channel has sub channels this is the range of sub channel numbers Example ASETUP TARGET ALL ASETUP TARGET ASETUP TARGET ALL Description An error will occur if you specify a channel that does not have a module installed in it An error will occur if you specify a sub channel that does not exist ASETup UNDO Function Undoes auto setup Syntax ASETup UNDO IM DL850 17EN 5 27 puewwoy 5 4 CALibrate Group The commands in this group deal with calibration You can perform the s
310. re action Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE lt Boolean gt CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE ON CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE CAPTURE ACTION SAVE MODE 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding data save settings of other actions Example CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME Function Sets or queries the file name that is used when captured data is saved to a storage medium Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE NAME Filename CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME ABC CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE NAME ABC Description This setting is shared with other file name settings Example CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory Function Sets the current directory on the storage medium where the screen capture is saved to as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE CDIRectory lt String gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE CDIRECTORY ABCD Example IM DL850 17EN 5 29 5 5 CAPTure Group CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE Function Sets or queries the data format that is used when captured data is saved to a storage medium Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE ASCii BINary FLOat CAPTure ACTion SAVE TYPE CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE TYPE BINARY Description This setting is shared with the corresponding data format settings of other actions Example CAPTure BITDisp Function Sets or queries whether capt
311. rs System errors communication 100 to 199 200 to 299 300 to 399 400 to 499 300 and 399 Listed below Communication Syntax Errors 100 to 199 Code Message Corrective Action Page 102 Syntax error A syntax error not covered by error codes 100 to 199 Chapters 4 and 5 103 Invalid separator Separate data values with a comma 4 1 104 Data type error See page 4 6 and 4 7 and use the correct data type for each 4 6 and parameter 4 7 105 GET not allowed GET is not supported as a response to an interface message 3 8 108 Parameter not allowed Check the number of data values 4 6 and chapter 5 109 Missing parameter Be sure to include all necessary data values 4 6 and chapter 5 111 Header separator error Use a comma to separate each header from its data 4 1 112 Program mnemonic too long Check the command length Chapter 5 113 Undefined header Check the header Chapter 5 114 Header suffix out of range Check the header Chapter 5 120 Numeric data error A value must be specified where the syntax contains lt NRf gt 4 6 123 Exponent too large Where the syntax contains lt NR3 gt make the exponent that follows 4 6 and E smaller chapter 5 124 Too many digits Limit numeric values to 255 digits or less 4 6 and chapter 5 128 Numeric data not allowed Use a data type other than lt NRf gt 4 6 and chapter 5 131 Invalid suffix Check the units where the syntax co
312. s Setting Record Length and Sample Rate in the DL850 DL850V Startup Guide Example WAVeform MODule Function Queries the module of the waveform specified by the WAVeform TRACe command Syntax WAVeform MODule WAVEFORM MODULE WAVEFORM MODULE M701250 Description The values returned for each module are listed below 701250 HS10M12 720240 CAN If the waveform that WAVeform commands will be applied to is set as an event EVENT is returned Example 5 134 IM DL850 17EN 5 35 WAVeform Group WAVeform OFFSet Function Queries the offset value used to convert the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values Syntax WAVeform OFFSet WAVEFORM OFFSET WAVEFORM OFFSET 0 0000000E 00 Description When you are using linear scaling this command returns a value that includes the scaling data If the source waveform is logic data this command returns 0 Example WAVeform RANGe Function Queries the measurement range used to convert the waveform data specified by the WAVeform TRACe command to physical values Syntax WAVeform RANGe WAVEFORM RANGE gt WAVEFORM RANGE 50 000000E 00 Description When you are using linear scaling this command returns a value that includes the scaling data If the source waveform is logic data this command returns 1 Example WAVeform RECord Function Sets or queries the main waveform record number that
313. s inverted ON or not OFF for an 5 48 installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Queries all the linear scaling settings of an installed module that can perform 5 48 analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the scaling coefficient A that is used during linear scaling for 5 48 AVALue an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an 5 49 BVALue installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed module 5 49 DISPlaytype that can perform analog voltage measurements IM DL850 17EN 5 5 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an 5 49 DISPlaytype MODE installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel x VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the 5 49 DISPlaytype DECimalnum display mode is set to Float for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage LSCale Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling wh
314. s or queries the color tone of the screen capture data that will be saved 5 89 INITialize Group INITialize EXECute Initializes the settings This is an overlap command 5 90 INITialize UNDO Undoes the setting initialization 5 90 LSTart Group LSTart Log STart Starts waveform acquisition immediately 5 91 LSTart Starts waveform acquisition immediately and waits for acquisition to 5 91 complete MATH Group MATH lt x gt Queries all computation settings 5 92 MATH x AVERage Queries all averaging computation settings 5 92 MATH lt x gt AVERage CCOunt Sets or queries the cycle count of cycle averaging 5 92 MATH x AVERage COUNt Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging 5 92 MATH lt x gt AVERage EWEight Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging 5 92 MATH x AVERage MODE Sets or queries the averaging mode 5 92 MATH x AVERage TYPE Sets or queries the averaging domain 5 92 MATH lt x gt BINary Queries all binary computation settings 5 92 MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold level of the specified channel for binary 5 93 SCHannel lt x gt THReshold computations MATH lt x gt CONStant lt x gt Sets or queries a constant for user defined computation 5 93 MATH lt x gt DEFine Sets or queries an expression for user defined computation 5 93 MATH lt x gt DISPlay Sets or queries whether computations will be performed 5 93 MATH lt x gt
315. s or queries the main capture mode during dual capture Syntax CAPTure MCMode AUTO ONSTart CAPTure MCMode Example CAPTURE MCMODE AUTO CAPTURE MCMODE gt CAPTURE MCMODE AUTO CAPTure MODE Function Sets or queries whether the dual capture mode is enabled Syntax CAPTure MODE Boolean CAPTure MODE Example CAPTURE MODE ON CAPTURE MODE CAPTURE MODE 1 CAPTure RLENgth Function Sets or queries the dual capture length Syntax CAPTure RLENgth lt NRf gt CAPTure RLENgth NRf 5000 to 500000 Step 5000 10000 25000 50000 100000 250000 500000 Example CAPTURE RLENGTH 10000 CAPTURE RLENGTH gt CAPTURE RLENGTH 10000 5 30 IM DL850 17EN 5 5 CAPTure Group CAPTure TDIV Function Sets or queries the dual capture T DIV setting Syntax CAPTure TDIV lt Time gt CAPTure TDIV lt Time gt lus to 60s Example CAPTURE TDIV 100 0E 06 CAPTURE TDIV gt CAPTURE TDIV 100 0E 06 CAPTure WINDow Function Queries all dual capture display window settings Syntax CAPTure WINDow CAPTure WINDow MAG Function Sets or queries the dual capture window zoom factor as a time Syntax CAPTure WINDow MAG Time CAPTure WINDow MAG Example CAPTURE WINDOW MAG 100 0E 06 CAPTURE WINDOW MAG gt CAPTURE WINDOW MAG 100 0E 06 lt NRf gt lus to 60s CAPTure WINDow MODE Function Sets or queries whether the dual capture window is turne
316. set to 0 CHANnel x STRain LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed strain module Syntax gt CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype CHANnel x STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype MODE x to 16 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE gt CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT IM DL850 17EN 5 45 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel x STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed strain module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x gt STRain LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 Example CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM CHANNEL1 STRAIN LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANnel x STRain LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling whe
317. specified location in the internal memory Syntax STORe SETup lt x gt EXECute lt x gt 1 to 3 Example STORE SETUP1 EXECUTE 5 116 IM DL850 17EN 5 32 SYSTem Group The commands in this group deal with the system You can make the same settings and queries that you can by pressing the UTILITY key on the front panel and then using the System Config menu SYSTem Function Queries all system settings Syntax SYSTem SYSTem CLICk Function Sets or queries whether click sounds are produced Syntax SYSTem CLICk Boolean SYSTem CLICk Example SYSTEM CLICK ON SYSTEM CLICK gt SYSTEM CLICK 1 SYSTem CLOCk Function Queries all date time settings Syntax SYSTem CLOCk SYSTem CLOCk DATE Function Sets or queries the date Syntax SYSTem CLOCk DATE String SYSTem CLOCk DATE String YYYY MM DD Specify the year according to the Gregorian calendar YYYY 2000 to 2099 SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 2010 04 01 SYSTEM CLOCK DATE SYSTEM CLOCK DATE 2010 04 01 Description Regardless of the setting that you have made using the SYST CLOC FORM command this command returns responses in the format shown Example above SYSTem CLOCk FORMat Function Sets or queries the date format Syntax SYSTem CLOCk FORMat lt NRf gt SYSTem CLOCk FORMat lt NRf gt 1 to 4 SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT 1 SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT gt SYSTEM CLOCK FORMAT 1 Description T
318. stalled frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer SMOothing VALue lt x gt 1 to 16 lt Time gt Oms to 1000 0ms Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE 0 1 CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE gt CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP FILTER SMOOTHING VALUE 0 1000 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage Function Queries all the pulse averaging settings of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage MODE Function Sets or queries whether pulse averaging is turned on for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup PAVerage MODE lt Boolean gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage MOD lt x gt 1 tol Example CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE MODE ON R D R LTer E CHANNELS FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE MODE gt CHANNEL5S FREQ SETUP FILTER PAVERAGE MODE 1 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage VALue Function Sets or queries the number of pulses to average over for an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage VALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup FILTer PAVerage VALue lt x gt 1 to 16 NRf 1 to 4096 Example CHANNEL5 FREQ SETUP
319. t 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL LSCALE AVALUE 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE AVALUE gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE AVALUE 25 0000E 00 Description The coefficient cannot be set to 0 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue Function Sets or queries the offset value B that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale BVALue xl 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 NRf 9 9999E 30 to 1E 30 0 1E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE 25 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE gt CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE BVALUE 25 0000E 00 CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype Function Queries all the linear scaling display mode settings of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype MODE Function Sets or queries the display mode that is used during linear scaling for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlay
320. t of all channels 5 105 MONitor LATCh ASENd Sends the numeric monitor data in ASCII format of the specified channel 5 105 CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MONitor LATCh EXECute Latches the monitor data 5 105 MONitor LATCh Sends numeric monitor data 5 105 SEND ALL CHANnel lt x gt SCHannelcx j IM DL850 17EN 5 17 5 1 List of Commands Command Function Page MTRigger Group MTRigger Manually triggers the DL850 DL850V 5 106 ECall Group RECall SETup lt x gt EXECute Recalls setup data from an internal memory area 5 107 SEARch Group SEARch Queries all search settings 5 108 SEARch ABORt Aborts the search 5 108 SEARCh EDGE Queries all edge search settings 5 108 SEARCh EDGE COUNt Sets or queries the edge search count 5 108 SEARCh EDGE HYSTeresis Sets or queries the edge search determination level hysteresis 5 108 SEARCh EDGE LEVEL Sets or queries the edge search determination level 5 108 SEARCh EDGE LOGic BIT lt x gt Sets or queries the edge polarity of the specified bit for when the edge 5 108 search is performed on logic traces SEARch EDGE SLOPe Sets or queries the edge polarity for when the edge search is performed on 5 108 traces other than logic traces SEARCh EDGE SOURce Sets or queries the trace to perform t
321. t Boolean gt FILE SAVE ASCii TINFormation Example FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION ON FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION gt FILE SAVE ASCII TINFORMATION 1 FILE SAVE ASCii DPOint Function Sets or queries the type of decimal point that is used when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii DPOint POINt COMMa FILE SAVE ASCii DPOint FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT POINT FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT gt FILE SAVE ASCII DPOINT POINT Example FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel Function Sets or queries the writing method of sub channel data when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel SUPPlement SPACe gt FILE SAVE ASCii SCHannel FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL SPACE FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL gt FILE SAVE ASCII SCHANNEL SPACE Example FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension Function Sets or queries the file name extension that is used when saving data in ASCII format Syntax FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension CSV MATLab gt FILE SAVE ASCii EXTension FILE SAVE ASCII EXTENSION CSV FILE SAVE ASCII EXTENSION gt FILE SAVE ASCII EXTENSION CSV Example FILE SAVE BINary COMPression Function Sets or queries whether waveform data is compressed during saving Syntax FILE SAVE BINary COMPression lt Boolean gt FILE SAVE BINary COMPression FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRESSION ON FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRESSION gt FILE SAVE BINARY COMPRES
322. t Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE DY STATE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee DY VALue Function Queries the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DY VALue Example CURSOR TY DEGREE DY VALUE 0 0000000E 00 CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt Function Sets or queries an angle cursor position on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY DEGRee POSition lt x gt lt x gt 1 2 NRf 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length Example CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 1 CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 gt CURSOR TY DEGREE POSITION1 1 000000000000 CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt Function Sets or queries the angle reference start Ref1 or end Ref2 point on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt lt NRf gt CURSor TY DEGRee REFerence lt x gt x 1 2 NRf 5 to 5 the resolution depends on the measurement length Example CURSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 1 URSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 gt URSOR TY DEGREE REFERENCE1 1 000000000000 Qa CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue Function Sets or queries an angle cursor s reference angle on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee RVALue NRf CURS
323. t state The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850 DL850V is in local mode All keys are enabled The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode Note You cannot use the USB interface at the same time as other interfaces GP IB and Ethernet interfaces IM DL850 17EN 2 3 Connecting to the USB Interface Precautions to Be Taken When Connecting Probes Be sure to insert the USB cable connectors firmly into the USB ports If you are connecting multiple devices by using a USB hub connect the DL850 DL850V to the USB hub port that is closest to the port that the controller is connected to Do not connect a USB cable type B to the GO NO GO output terminal Doing so may damage the DL850 DL850V Do not connect or remove USB cables from the time when the DL850 DL850V is turned on until operation becomes available approximately 20 to 30 seconds Doing so may damage the DL850 DL850V IM DL850 17EN 2 3 e eyieju JSN 2 4 Configuring the DL850 DL850V USB Settings This section explains the settings listed below You must configure these settings when controlling the D L850 DL850V remotely through a USB interface Communication interface UTILITY Remote Ctrl Menu Press UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key to display the following menu Remote Ctrl lt Device i 7 Set Device to USB US
324. t x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY HORizontal lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY H CURSOR TY H CURSOR TY H Y lt x gt STATe o RIZONTAL Y1 STATE ON RIZONTAL Y1 STATE gt RIZONTAL Y1 STATE 1 O o CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of a horizontal cursor on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY HORizontal Y lt x gt VALue lt x gt 1 2 Example CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY HORIZONTAL Y1 VALUE 150 00000E 00 CURSor TY MARKer Function Queries all marker cursor settings for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all settings related to the marker cursor measurement items for the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt Function Queries all AX value settings AX is between the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AX value between the marker cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt DX lt y gt lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 STATE ON CURSOR TY MARKER M1 DX2 STATE gt CURSOR TY M
325. t x gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor XY VERTical X lt x gt STATe x 1 2 Example CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE ON CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 STATE 1 CURSor XY VERTical X x VALue Function Queries the X axis value of a V cursor on the X Y Syntax CURSor XY VERTical DX VALue display Example CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX VALUE gt Syntax CURSor XY VERTical X x VALue CURSOR XY VERTICAL DX lt x gt 1 2 VALUE 300 00000E 00 Example CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 VALUE gt CURSOR XY VERTICAL X1 VALUE 150 00000E 00 5 68 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor WAIT Function Syntax Example Description While the DL850 DL850V is waiting for the specified CURSor command to finish it will wait the time specified by the CURSor WAIT timeout value until it begins processing the subsequent command CURSOr WAIT NRf NRf 1 to 36000 timeout value in units of 100 msec CURSOR WAIT 100 gt CURSOR WAIT 1 If the CURSor command that is being processed finishes within the specified timeout this command will return 0 1 is returned if the CURSor command does not finish within the specified timeout or if no CURSor command is being processed Even if you make the timeout value long 0 is returned as soon as the CURSor command finishes IM DL850 17EN 5 69 puewwoy 5 10 DISPlay Group The commands in this group deal
326. tate of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel x CONDition OFF FALL RISE BISLope WINIn WINOut TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt CONDition TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that do not have Example sub channels TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition OFF FALL RISE BISLope WINIn WINOut TRIGger OR CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel x CONDition Example TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION RISE TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION gt TRIGGER OR CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Function Sets or queries the type of external trigger that is used with OR triggers Syntax TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE OFF FALL RISE TRIGger OR EXTernal TYPE Example TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE RISE TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE gt TRIGGER OR EXTERNAL TYPE RISE TRIGger OUT Function Queries all trigger output settings Syntax TRIGger OUT TRIGger OUT TIME Function Sets or queries t
327. the IEEE 488 1 interface functions the subsets that are supported See section 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications The operation of the device when it is assigned an address outside the 0 to 30 range The address of this instrument cannot be set to an address outside the 0 to 30 range Reaction of the device when the user changes the address The address change is detected when the user presses UTILITY and then the Remote Ctrl soft key and changes the address The new address is valid until the next time it is changed Device settings at power on The commands that can be used at power on As a basic rule the previous settings the settings that were in use when the DL850 DL850V was turned off are used There are no limitations on the commands that can be used at power on Message exchange options a Input buffer size 4096 bytes Queries that return multiple response messages See the example of the commands given in chapter 5 Queries that create response data when the command syntax is being analyzed All queries create response data when the command syntax is analyzed Queries that create response data during reception There are no queries of which the response data are created upon receiving a send request from the controller Commands that have parameters that restrict one another There are commands such as CHANnel lt x gt FREQ INOut PROBe and CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV that have parameters that place restri
328. the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DXX VALue x 1 2 CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 VALUE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE D1 VALUE 179 55000E 00 Example CURSor TY DEGRee DD Function Queries all angle difference Ad value settings The angle difference is between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY DEGRee DD STATe CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE ON CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE gt CURSOR TY DEGREE DD STATE 1 Example CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue Function Queries the angle difference Ad value between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DD VALue CURSOR TY DEGREE DD VALUE CURSOR TY DEGREE DD VALUE 719 55000E 00 Example CURSor TY DEGRee DY Function Queries all angle difference AY value settings The angle difference is between the angle cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DY 5 60 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the angle difference AY value between the angle cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY DEGRee DY STATe l
329. the output queue will be cleared if the CLS command is received just after a program message terminator IM DL850 17EN syuodey snjejs Hu 6 3 Standard Event Register Standard Event Register 7le 5 4 3 2 1 o0 PONURQCMEEXEDDEQYERQCOPC Bit 7 PON Power ON This bit is set to 1 when the DL850 DL850V is turned on Bit 6 URQ User Request Not used always zero e Bit 5 CME Command Error This bit is set to 1 when there is a command syntax error Example Incorrectly spelled command name 9 used in octal data Bit 4 EXE Execution Error This bit is set to 1 when the command syntax is correct but the command cannot be executed in the current state Example The DL850 DL850V receives a command whose parameter is outside the selectable range An attempt is made to print a hard copy while the DL850 DL850V is running Bit 3 DDE Device Error This bit is set to 1 when a command cannot be executed for internal reasons other than a command syntax error or command execution error e Bit 2 QYE Query Error This bit is set to 1 when a query command is received but the output queue is empty or the data is lost Example There is no response data Data is lost due to an overflow in the output queue Bit 1 RQC Request Control Not used always zero e Bit 0 OPC Operation Complete This bit is set to 1 upon the completion of the operation designated by the OPC comman
330. the specified parameter s settings for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt lt x gt 1 to 4 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s reference condition for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt CONDition OFF IN OUT lt x gt 1 to 4 Example HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION IN HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 CONDITION IN HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s source trace for history waveform parameter searches Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce lt NRf gt HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt SOURce lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NRf gt 1 to 16 Example HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE 1 HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE gt HISTORY PARAMETER ITEM1 SOURCE 1 HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE Function Queries for history waveform parameter searches the specified parameter s automatically measured item and upper and lower limits Syntax HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt x gt 1 to 4 5 86 IM DL850 17EN 5 16 HISTory Group HISTory PARameter ITEM lt x gt TYPE lt Parameter gt Function Sets or queries the specified parameter s upper and lower limits for history wave
331. the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel x CONDition OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel x CONDition CHAN x s x 1 to 16 Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION FALL TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION gt TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL3 CONDITION FALL Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel CONDition OFF FALL RISE TRIGger EOA CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel CONDition CHAN x s x 1 to 16 SCHannel x s x 1 to 16 sub channel Example TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION RISE TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION TRIGGER EOA CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION RISE Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels Oo o 3 TRIGger EOA CONDition i Function Sets or queries the achievement condition for A EdgeOnA triggers Syntax TRIGger EOA CONDition FALSe TRUE TRIGger EOA CONDition Example TRIGGER EOA CONDITION TRUE TRIGGER EOA CONDITION TRIGGER EOA CONDITION TRUE TRIGger HOLDoff Function Queries all hold off settings Syntax TRIGger HOLDoff TRIGger HOLD
332. ther a beep is sounded as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion BUZZer lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion BUZZer Example TRIGGER ACTION BUZZER ON TRIGGER ACTION BUZZER gt ACTION BUZZER 1 TRIGGER TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Function Sets or queries whether an screen capture is printed from the built in printer as an action Syntax TRIGger ACTion HCOPy lt Boolean gt TRIGger ACTion HCOPy Example TRIGGER ACTION HCOPY ON TRIGGER ACTION HCOPY gt ACTION HCOPY 1 TRIGGER TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE Function Syntax Example Sets or queries wheth er a screen capture is saved to the storage medium as an action TRIGger ACTion IMAGe MODE B TRIGger ACTion TRIGGER ACTION TRIGGER ACTION TRIGGER ACTION oolean gt IMAGe IMAGE MODE ON IMAGE MODE gt IMAGE MODE 1 TRIGger ACTion IMAGe CDIRectory Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the cu rrent directory on the storage medium where screen captures are saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion CDIRectory lt Str TRIGger ACTion TRIGGER ACTION CDIRECTORY NO 1 TRIGGER ACTION TRIGGER ACTION CDIRECTORY NO 1 MAGe ing gt MAGe CDIRectory MAGE MAGE CDIRECTORY gt MAGE TRIGger ACTion IMAGe DRIVe Function Syntax Example Sets the storage medi um that screen captures are saved to as an action TRIGger ACTion
333. tings Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL CAPTure ACTion MATL COUNt Function Sets or queries the upper limit of e mail transmissions to perform as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL COUNt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 1 to 1000 CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT gt CAPTURE ACTION MAIL COUNT 100 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding e mail transmission settings of other actions Example CAPTure ACTion MATL MODE Function Sets or queries whether e mail is transmitted as a capture action Syntax CAPTure ACTion MAIL MODE lt Boolean gt CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE ON CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE gt CAPTURE ACTION MAIL MODE 1 Description This setting is shared with the corresponding e mail transmission settings of other actions Example CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing Function Sets or queries the auto file naming method Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE ANAMing DATE NUMBering Example CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING gt CAPTURE ACTION SAVE ANAMING NUMBERING Description This setting is shared with the auto naming settings of other actions CAPTure ACTion SAVE B Function Queries all dual capture action data save 3 settings i Syntax CAPTure ACTion SAVE amp CAPTure ACTion SAVE MODE Function Sets or queries whether captured data is saved to a storage medium as a captu
334. tion that the search retrieved Syntax SEARCh SELect MAXimum Example SEARCH SELECT MAXIMUM gt SEARCH SELECT 5 Description The string NAN is returned if the search could not retrieve a position SEARCh EPOint End POint Function Sets or queries the search end position Syntax SEARCh EPOint lt NRf gt SEARch EPOint lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example SEARCH EPOINT 3 SEARCH EPOINT gt SEARCH EPOINT 3 000000000000 SEARch SPOint Start POint Function Sets or queries the search start position Syntax SEARCh SPOint lt NRf gt SEARCh SPOint lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the resolution depends on the measurement length Example SEARCH SPOINT 5 SEARCH SPOINT gt SEARCH SPOINT 5 000000000000 IM DL850 17EN 5 109 5 25 SEARch Group SEARCh TIME Function Queries all time search settings Syntax SEARCh TIME SEARch TIME TIME Function Sets or queries the time of the time search Syntax SEARCh TIME TIME NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf NRf SEARCh TIME TIME lt NRf gt 2000 or greater year lt NRf gt 1 to 12 month lt NRf gt 1 to 31 day lt NRf gt 0 to 23 hour lt NRf gt 0 to 59 minute lt NRf gt 0 to 59 second lt NRf gt 0 to 999999 microsecond Example SEARCH TIME TIME 2010 1 1 0 0 0 0 SEARCH TIME TIME SEARCH TIME TIME 2010 1
335. to acquisition ACQuire AVERage COUNt ACQuire MODE ACQuire AVERage EWEight ACQuire CLOCK ACQuire RLENgth ACQuire COUNt Q When Concatenating Commands of the Same Group The DL850 DL850V stores the hierarchical level of the command that is currently being executed and processes the next command on the assumption that it belongs to the same level Therefore the common header section can be omitted for commands that belong to the same group Example ACQuire MODE NORMal COUNt 1 lt PMT gt M9IAJ9AQ Buruiuej80Jd gt When Concatenating Commands of Different Groups If the subsequent command does not belong to the same group place a colon in front of the header cannot be omitted Example ACQuire MODE NORMal DISPlay FORMat SINGle lt PMT gt When Concatenating Simple Headers If a simple header follows another command place a colon in front of the simple header cannot be omitted Example ACQuire MODE NORMal STARt lt PMT gt When Concatenating Common Commands Common commands that are defined in IEEE 488 2 1992 are independent of hierarchy There is no need to use a colon Example ACQuire MODE NORMal CLS COUNt 1 lt PMT gt When Separating Commands with lt PMT gt If you separate two commands with a terminator two program messages will be sent Therefore the common header must be specified for each command even if commands belonging to the same comma
336. ts between marker cursors CURSor TY VERTical DY Function Queries all Y axis value settings for V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe Function Sets or queries whether the Y axis value for V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical DY STATe Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL DY STATE ON CURSOR TY VERTICAL DY STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL DY STATE 1 CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue Function Queries the Y axis value of V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical DY VALue CURSor TY VERTical PERDt Function Queries all 1 AT value settings 1 AT is between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt 5 64 IM DL850 17EN 5 9 CURSor Group CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY VERTical PERDt STATe CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE ON CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE gt CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT STATE 1 Example CURSor TY VERTical PERDt VALue Function Queries the 1 AT value between the V cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY VERTical PERDt VALue Example CURSOR TY VERTICAL PERDT VALUE 250 00000E 00 Description If the source w
337. ts or queries the averaging domain Syntax MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE FREQuency TIME MATH lt x gt AVERage TYPE x 1 to 8 this command performs the same no matter what value you specify Example MATH1 AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY MATH1 AVERAGE TYPE gt MATH1 AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY Description This command is valid on models with the G2 option MATH lt x gt BINary Function Queries all binary computation settings Syntax MATH lt x gt BINary 5 92 IM DL850 17EN 5 20 MATH Group MATH x BINary CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt THReshold Function Sets or queries the threshold level of the specified channel for binary computations Syntax MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt THReshold lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt THReshold MATH lt x gt BINary CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt THReshold lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt NRf NRf MATH x BINary CHANnel x SCHannel lt x gt THReshold MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 8 CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 SCHannel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 for modules that have sub channels lt Voltage gt lt Current gt and lt NRf gt The selectable range varies depending on settings such as the range and offset For details see the DL8
338. type MODE EXPonent FLOating CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype MODE lt xl gt 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 Example CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE MODE EXPONENT 5 52 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the decimal place that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum lt NRf gt AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype DECimalnum xi 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 x2 to 16 lt NRf gt 0 to 3 CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANNEL3 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE SCHANNEL1 LSCALE DISPLAYTYPE DECIMALNUM AUTO CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt LSCale DISPlaytype SUBunit Function Syntax Example Sets or queries the unit prefix that is used during linear scaling when the display mode is set to Float for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage
339. ueries a marker cursor position on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt NRf gt CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt POSition lt x gt 1 to 4 lt NR gt 5 to 5 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION gt CURSOR TY MARKER M1 POSITION 3 000000000000 CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe Function Sets or queries the source waveform that you want to measure using the marker cursors on the T Y display Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M x TRACe OFF NRf MATH x NRf CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt TRACe lt NRf gt to 16 lt x gt 1 to 8 lt NRf gt to 16 only when it is necessary to specify the sub channel Example CURSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE 1 URSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE gt URSOR TY MARKER M1 TRACE 1 Q Q CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X Function Queries all X axis settings for a marker cursor on the T Y display CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X lt x gt 1 to 4 Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe Function Sets or queries whether the X axis value for a marker cursor on the T Y display is displayed Syntax CURSor TY MARKer M lt x gt X STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor TY RKer M lt x gt X STATe lt x gt 1 to Example CURSOR TY CURSOR TY CURSOR TY pueululo RKER M4 X STATE ON RKER M4 X STATE gt RKER M4 X STATE 1 S558 8
340. ueries all FFT averaging settings Syntax FFT AVERage FFT AVERage MODE Function Sets or queries the FFT averaging mode Syntax FFT AVERage MODE EXPonent LINear OFF PEAK FFT AVERage MODE Example FFT AVERAGE MODE PEAK FFT AVERAGE MODE gt FFT AVERAGE MODE PEAK FFT AVERage TYPE Function Sets or queries the averaging domain Syntax FFT AVERage TYPE FREQuency TIME gt FFT AVERage TYPE Example gt FFT AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY gt FFT AVERAGE TYPE gt FFT AVERAGE TYPE FREQUENCY FFT AVERage COUNt Function Sets or queries the average count of linear averaging Syntax FFT AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt gt FFT AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt 2 to 128 in 2n steps Example FFT AVERAGE COUNT 32 FFT AVERAGE COUNT gt FFT AVERAGE COUNT 32 FFT AVERage EWEight Function Sets or queries the attenuation constant of exponential averaging Syntax FFT AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt FFT AVERage EWEight lt NRf gt 2 to 256 in 2n steps Example FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT gt FFT AVERAGE EWEIGHT 16 FFT POINt Function Sets or queries the number of analysis source points of the FFT windows Syntax FFT POINt lt NRf gt FFT POINt NRf 1000 2000 5000 10000 20000 50000 100000 Example FFT POINT 1000 FFT POINT gt FFT POINT 1000 Description The setting is the same for Window 1 and Window 2 FFT STARt Function
341. ultiplier gt or Unit 4 6 IM DL850 17EN 4 4 Data Register Register is an integer that can be expressed in decimal hexadecimal octal or binary notation It is used when each bit of the value has a particular meaning The following types of expressions are possible Form Example lt NRf gt i H lt Hexadecimal value made up of the digits HOF 0 to 9 andA to F gt Q lt Octal value made up of the digits 0 to 7 gt Q777 B Binary value made up of the digits 0 and 1 gt B001100 Register is not case sensitive Response messages are always expressed in the lt NR1 gt form lt Character Data gt lt Character data gt is a predefined character string mnemonics It is mainly used to indicate that an option listed as a character string in braces must be selected and entered The data interpretation rules are the same as those described in Header Interpretation Rules on page 4 4 Form Example AC DC GND AC As with the header the COMMunicate VERBose command can be used to select whether to return the response in the full form or in the abbreviated form e The COMMunicate HEADer setting does not affect character data Boolean Boolean is data that indicates on or off The following types of expressions are possible Form Examples ON OFF NR ON OFF 1 0 When Boolean is expressed in the NRf form OFF is sel
342. unction Syntax Example installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S UNIT lt String gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S lt String gt Up to 4 ETup ETup UNIT characters CHANNELS FREQ SETUP UNIT ABC CHANNELS FREQ SET CHANNELS FREQ SET UP UNIT gt UP UNIT ABC CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup UPULse Sets or queries the unit pulse setting of an Function Syntax Example installed frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S UPULse NRf CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S NRf 9 9999E 30 CHANNELS FREQ SET CHANNELS FREQ SET CHANNELS FREQ SET ETup ETup UPULse to 9 9999E 30 UP UPULSE 3 UP UPULSE gt UP UPULSE 3 CHANnel lt x gt FREQ SETup VUNit Sets or queries the velocity unit of an installed Function Syntax Example frequency module CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S VUNit String CHANnel lt x gt FREQ S lt String gt Up to 4 CHANNEL5 FREQ SET CHANNELS FREQ SET CHANNELS FREQ SET ETup ETup VUNit characters UP VUNIT m s UP VUNIT gt UP VUNIT m s 5 42 IM DL850 17EN 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV Function Sets or queries the Value Div setting of an installed frequency module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt CHANnel lt x gt FREQ VDIV lt NRf gt lt Frequency gt lt Time gt See the DL850
343. ured event waveforms are displayed Syntax CAPTure BITDisp Boolean CAPTURE BITDISP ON CAPTURE BITDISP gt CAPTURE BITDISP 1 Example CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Function Queries the largest number of the captured waveforms Syntax CAPTure CAPNum MAXimum Description This command is valid when waveforms are acquired with the capture mode set to On Start CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Function Queries the smallest number of the captured waveforms Syntax CAPTure CAPNum MINimum Description This command is valid when waveforms are acquired with the capture mode set to Auto CAPTure FORMat Function Sets or queries the display format of the capture window Syntax CAPTure FORMat MAIN lt NRf gt CAPTure FORMat lt NRi gt 1 2 3 4 6 B 12 16 CAPTURE FORMAT MAIN CAPTURE FORMAT gt CAPTURE FORMAT MAIN Example CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt Function Queries all group display settings of the capture window Syntax CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt Function Sets or queries the displayed waveform in the specified group display of the capture window Syntax CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt Boolean gt CAPTure GROup lt x1 gt TRACe lt x2 gt lt xl gt 1t lt x2 gt 1t Example CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 1 CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 gt CAPTURE GROUP1 TRACE1 1 CAPTure MCMode Main Capture Mode Function Set
344. ured value of a waveform parameter Syntax MEASure CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt MATH lt x gt lt Parameter gt VALue NRf CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 1 to 48000 lt Parameter gt AMPLitude AVERage AVGFreq AVGPeriod BWIDth1 BWIDth2 DUTYcycle FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MIDDle MINimum NOVershoot NWIDth PERiod PNUMber POVershoot PTOPeak PWIDth RISE RMS SDEViation TYlInteg TY2Integ Example MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK VALUE gt MEASURE CHANNEL1 PTOPEAK VALUE 30 516667E 00 Description This command returns NAN if the value cannot be measured Parameters cannot be measured if the measurement has not been performed or if the measurement was performed but computations were not performed because the specified range exceeded 10 Mpoint The lt NRf gt at the end is used to specify which iteration of statistical processing to query the parameter value from This command returns NAN Not A Number if the specified value does not exist e For non cyclic statistical processing lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the most recent history parameter value will be queried If you include lt NRf gt the history parameter value of the waveform NRf times before the newest history waveform will be queried After cyclic statistical processing has been completed lt NRf gt can be omitted If you omit lt NRf gt the parameter value within
345. ursor measurements You can make the same settings and queries of settings and measured values that you can by using the CURSOR key on the front panel If the selectable range of the time axis is lt NRf gt 5 to 5div the selectable range varies depending on settings such as the record length For details see Selectable Range of Cursor Positions under Notes about Cursor Measurement in chapter 9 of IM DL850 01EN CURSor Function Queries all cursor measurement settings Syntax CURSor CURSor FFT Function Queries all FFT cursor settings Syntax CURSor FFT CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt Function Queries all settings of an FFT cursor marker cursor Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt x 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt Function Queries all AF display settings AF is between the FFT cursors marker cursors lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe Function Sets or queries whether the AF value between the FFT cursors marker cursors is displayed Syntax CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe lt Boolean gt CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt STATe lt x gt 1 to 4 lt y gt 1 to 4 Example CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE ON CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE gt CURSOR FFT MARKER M1 DF2 STATE 1 CURSor FFT MARKer M lt x gt DF lt y gt VALue Funct
346. uto naming Capture 2 2 ceci eit etre 5 29 autonaming flle 2 2t cce Leste c rte eee 5 78 auto naming hard disk recording i auto scrollitig 32 hers E treten he peni ais e nue 5 139 atto seltup cani x percer tne mde xc RARE 5 27 average number of times frequency 5 41 average count FFT 5 74 average count MATH e 5 92 averaging domain FFT sse 5 74 averaging domain MATH sessessseeeeeenee 5 92 B Page background 5 89 backlight automatic off 5 119 balancing Stram sesiune iere retinere 5 44 bandwidth limit 16CH voltages sisisisiiiisnsiisiiirs 5 51 bandwidth limit acceleration bandwidth limit temperature beep capture zs beep GO NO GO a iet pira hei ze Er c pee ai me st days beep trigger cip rete retener eaae rei block data Boolean rer eee ro rro ve E Nen mx n bridge voltage straln e tni etse burnout temperature C Page calibrati aio cr D Oe c ei eds 5 28 5 141 capture WIndOW ccce dert iniecto 5 30 center frequency frequency character data roro e einn 4 7 character otaltioliS esr oreet po ger pi Febre pere e E SEE on i chattering elimination acceleration 25s chattering elimination logic seeeeeeesss clear MACE iecit e Dee x EM ERE CICK SOUnd ttr ort enne iere COImarids cotone ee ter reden t Ren comment
347. value per pit of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt FACTor lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to 16 SCHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 5E15 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 FACTOR 5 00000E 15 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet Function Sets or queries the scaling constant offset value of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt OFFSet NRf CHANnel lt x gt s x 13 to 16 SCHANnel x s x 1 to 16 lt NRf gt 9 9999E 30 to 9 9999E 30 Example CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 5E15 CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET gt CHANNEL13 CAN SCHANNEL1 OFFSET 5 00000E 15 Description This command is valid when the data type the CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt VTYPe command is set to UNSigned or SIGNed CHANnel x CAN SCHannel x SCALe Function Sets or queries the display range values upper and lower limits of a sub channel on a CAN bus monitor module Syntax CHANnel lt x gt CAN SCHannel lt x gt SCALe AUTO DEFault lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt s lt x gt 13 to
348. vent register are read using the ESR command A CLS command is received The DL850 DL850V is turned off and then back on 6 4 IM DL850 17EN 6 4 Extended Event Register The extended event register receives information about changes in the condition register which indicates the DL850 DL850V s internal condition The information is the result of edge detection performed by the transition filter FilTersx gt gt 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Condition register 15 1413 12 11 10 9 3 2 1 0 STATus CONDition 0 AN 0 RUN SCH NGO o HST MES acs PRN TST CAL TRG REC CAP Transition filter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STATus FILTer lt x gt RISE FALL BOTH NEVer yyy V Y v Q3 lt N o o lt lt O o Extended event register 15 14 13 12 11 10 4 STATus EESR Qo The condition register bits are described below Bit 0 CAP Capture This bit is 1 when waveform acquisition is in progress Bit 1 REC Record This bit is 1 when recording is in progress Bit 2 TRG Awaiting Trigger This bit is 1 when the DL850 DL850V is waiting for a trigger Bit 3 CAL Calibration This bit is 1 when calibration is in progress Bit 4 TST Testing This bit is 1 when a self test is in progress Bit 5 PRN Printing This
349. w triggers 5 130 WWIDth TRIGger TGTime Queries all T gt Time trigger settings 5 130 TRIGger TGTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for T gt Time triggers 5 131 TRIGger TIMer Queries all time trigger settings 5 131 TRIGger TIMer DATE Sets or queries the date for time triggers 5 131 TRIGger TIMer INTerval Sets or queries the trigger interval for time triggers 5 131 TRIGger TIMer TIME Sets or queries the time for time triggers 5 131 TRIGger TITime Queries all T1 lt T lt T2 trigger settings 5 131 TRIGger TITime TIME lt x gt Sets or queries the pulse width for T1 lt T lt T2 triggers 5 131 TRIGger TLTime Queries all T Time trigger settings 5 131 TRIGger TLTime TIME Sets or queries the pulse width for T Time triggers 5 131 TRIGger TOTime Queries all T T1 T2 T trigger settings 5 131 TRIGger TOTime TIME x Sets or queries the pulse width for T lt T1 T2 lt T triggers 5 131 TRIGger TYPE Sets or queries the trigger type 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow Queries all wave window trigger settings 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow CHANnel lt x gt Sets or queries the state of the specified channel for wave window triggers 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow FREQuency Sets or queries the cycle frequency for wave window triggers 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow REFCycle Sets or queries the reference cycle for wave window triggers 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Queries all synchronization channel settings for wave window triggers 5 132 TRIGger WWINdow SYNC Sets or queries t
350. when the input coupling of an installed acceleration 5 32 voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel x ACCL COUPling Sets or queries the input coupling setting of an installed acceleration voltage 5 32 module CHANnel lt x gt ACCL GAIN Sets or queries the gain when the input coupling of an installed acceleration 5 32 voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL POSition Sets or queries the vertical position when the input coupling of an installed 5 32 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SCALe Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen when the input 5 32 coupling of an installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL SENSitivity Sets or queries the sensitivity when the input coupling of an installed 5 33 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL UNIT Sets or queries the unit string when the input coupling of an installed 5 33 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL VARiable Sets or queries the scale setup mode when the input coupling of an installed 5 33 acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt ACCL ZOOM Sets or queries the vertical zoom factor when the input coupling of an 5 33 installed acceleration voltage module is set to acceleration CHANnel lt x gt CAN Queries all the settings of a CAN bus monitor module 5 33 C
351. x GONogo GONogo ACONdi tion Function Sets or queries the GO NO GO determination action condition Syntax GONogo ACONdition ALWays FAILure SUCCess GONogo ACONdition Example GONOGO ACONDITION ALWAYS GONOGO ACONDITION gt GONOGO ACONDITION ALWAYS GONogo ACTion Function Queries all settings for the action that is performed when the condition is met and the settings for the condition itself Syntax GONogo ACTion GONogo ACTion BUZZer Function Sets or queries whether a beep is sounded when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion BUZZer Boolean GONogo ACTion BUZZer GONOGO ACTION BUZZER ON GONOGO ACTION BUZZER GONOGO ACTION BUZZER 1 Example GONogo ACTion HCOPy HardCOPY Function Sets or queries whether a screen capture is printed from the built in printer when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion HCOPy Boolean GONogo ACTion HCOPy GONOGO ACTION HCOPY ON GONOGO ACTION HCOPY gt GONOGO ACTION HCOPY 1 Example GONogo ACTion IMAGe Function Queries all settings for the screen capture that is saved when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE Function Sets or queries whether a screen capture is saved when the condition is met Syntax GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE lt Boolean gt GONogo ACTion IMAGe MODE GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MODE ON GONOGO ACTION IMAGE MO
352. x 11 ms Approx 3s 1000000 Approx 100 ms Approx 125 ms Approx 30 s between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a COMMunicate REMote ON command from the PC REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850 DL850V is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode However this does not work if the DL850 DL850V has received a COMMunicate LOCKout ON command from the PC The DL850 DL850V switches to local mode when it receives a COMMunicate REMote OFF command from the PC regardless of the local lockout state The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850 DL850V is in local mode All keys are enabled The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode Note You cannot use the Ethernet interface at the same time as other interfaces GP IB and USB interfaces IM DL850 17EN 1 2 Ethernet Interface Features and Specifications User Verification Function To connect the DL850 DL850V to a network as an FTP server you have to enter a user name
353. x gt 1 to 16 lt Voltage gt and lt Current gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET 0 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE OFFSET 1 00000E 00 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel x VOLTage POSition x to 16 NRf 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Example CHANNELI1 VOLTAGE POSITION 1 00 HANNEL1 VOLTAGE POSITION gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE POSITION 1 00 Q CHANnel x VOLTage PROBe Function Sets or queries the probe type of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel x VOLTage PROBe NRf C10 C100 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage PROBe x to 16 lt NRf gt 1 10 100 1000 Example CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE 10 CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE gt CHANNEL1 VOLTAGE PROBE 10 Description You cannot set or query the probe type for the 701261 701262 or 701265 CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage SCALe lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt lt Current gt lt Current gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt
354. x2 gt OFFSet xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 lt Voltage gt The selectable range varies depending on the range setting Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition Function Sets or queries the vertical position for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt POSition xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 lt NRf gt 5 00 to 5 00 div in 0 01 div steps Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe Function Sets or queries the upper and lower limits of the screen for an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe lt Voltage gt lt Voltage gt NRf NRf CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt SCALe xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 lt Voltage gt and lt NRf gt The selectable r
355. xample TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL1 SCHANNEL1 BIT1 LOW TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare HIGH LOW WLIn WLOut TRIGger AND CHANnel x CONDition TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION gt TRIGGER AND CHANNEL2 CONDITION HIGH Example Description Use this command on channels that do not have sub channels TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition Function Sets or queries the state of the specified sub channel of the specified logic channel for AND triggers Syntax TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt CONDition DONTcare H GH LOW WLIn WLOut TRIGger AND CHANnel lt x gt Hannel lt x gt CONDition Example TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNELI CONDITION TRIGGER AND CHANNEL15 SCHANNEL1 CONDITION HIGH Description Use this command on channels that have sub channels TRIGger ATRigger Function Queries all condition A settings Syntax TRIGger ATRigger TRIGger ATRigger CHANnel lt x gt BIT lt x gt Function Sets or queries the state of the specified bit o
356. y x 1 2 lt NR gt 0 to 1E 30 Example FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE SENSITIVITY 20 0000E 00 FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE SENSITIVITY gt FFT WAVEFORM1 VSCALE SENSITIVITY 20 0000E 00 Description lt x gt 2 is valid on models with the G2 option IM DL850 17EN 5 75 5 12 FFT Group FFT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt Sets or queries an FFT window s FFT source channel Function Syntax Example Description LE lt N LE FT WAVeform lt x gt SOURce lt x gt MATH lt x gt Rf lt NRf gt FT WAVeform lt x gt SOURCe lt x gt WAVeform lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 SO URce lt x gt s lt x gt 1 2 MATH lt x gt s lt x gt 1 to 6 Fi Su DE LE rst lt NRf gt 1 to 16 b channel NRf 1 to 16 FT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 1 FT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 gt FFT WAVEFORM1 SOURCE1 1 This command returns Math1 if no modules are installed 5 76 IM DL850 17EN 5 13 FILE Group The commands in this group deal with USB storage media the internal hard disk and external hard disks You can perform the same operations and make the same settings and queries that you can by using the FILE key on the front panel FILE Function Queries all storage media settings Syntax gt FILE FILE COPY ABORt Function Aborts file copying Syntax FILE COPY ABORt Example FILE COPY ABORT FILE COPY CDIRectory Function Changes the
357. y CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COLor BLUE BGReen CYAN DBLue GRAY GREen LBLue LGReen MAGenta MGReen ORANge PINK PURPle RED SPINk YELLow DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt MATH lt x gt COLor For channels that have sub channels DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor BLUE BGReen CYAN DBLue GRAY GREen LBLue LGReen MAGenta MGReen ORANge PINK PURPl1e RED SPINK YELLow DISPlay CHANnel lt x gt SCHannel lt x gt COLor Example DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR YELLOW DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR gt DISPLAY CHANNEL1 COLOR YELLOW Description The FFT1 and FFT2 waveforms are the same color as the MATH7 and MATH8 waveforms respectively DISPlay COLor BASecolor Function Sets or queries the base color of the screen Syntax DISPlay COLor BASecolor BLUE GRAY DISPlay COLor BASecolor Example DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR GRAY DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR gt DISPLAY COLOR BASECOLOR GRAY DISPlay DECimation Function Sets or queries the number of dots after decimation that are used on the dot display Syntax DISPlay DECimation lt NRf gt DISPlay DECimation lt NRf gt 2000 to 100000 Example DISPLAY DECIMATION 2000 DISPLAY DECIMATION DISPLAY DECIMATION 2000 5 70 IM DL850 17EN 5 10 DISPlay Group DISPlay ESIZe Extra window Size Function Sets or queries the size of the extra window Syntax DISPlay ESIZe lt NRf gt AUTO DISPlay ESIZe lt
358. y listen only and controller capabilities are not available on the DL850 DL850V Switching between Remote and Local Modes Switching from Local to Remote Mode The DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode when it is in local mode and it receives a REN Remote Enable message from the PC REMOTE appears at the top center of the screen once the DL850 DL850V is in remote mode All keys except the SHIFT CLEAR TRACE keys are disabled The local mode settings are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to remote mode Switching from Remote to Local Mode When the DL850 DL850V is in Remote mode and you press SHIFT CLEAR TRACE the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode These keys are disabled when local lockout see page 3 7 has been activated by a controller The REMOTE indicator at the top center of the screen disappears once the DL850 DL850V is in local mode All keys are enabled The settings in remote mode are retained even when the DL850 DL850V switches to local mode Note You cannot use the GP IB interface simultaneously with other interfaces USB and Ethernet interfaces 3 4 IM DL850 17EN 3 4 GP IB Interface Specifications GP IB Interface Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Functional specifications Protocol Code Mode Address setup Clearing remote mode Functional Specifications IEEE St d 488 1978 See the table below IEEE St d 488 2 1992 ISO ASCII
359. yntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe lt NRf gt lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature SCALe lt x gt to 16 lt NRf gt 5432 to 5432 in 0 1 steps Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCALE 1300 0 200 0 CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCALE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE SCALE 1300 0 200 0 CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE Function Sets or queries the thermocouple type that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel x TEMPerature TYPE K E J TILIUINIRISIBIW Au7 e CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature TYPE lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE TYPE K CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE TYPE gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE TYPE K IM DL850 17EN 5 47 5 6 CHANnel Group CHANnel x TEMPerature UNIT Function Sets or queries the unit that is used when temperature measurements are performed Syntax CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT C K CHANnel lt x gt TEMPerature UNIT lt x gt 1 to 16 Example CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE UNIT C CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE UNIT gt CHANNEL9 TEMPERATURE UNIT C CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage Function Queries all settings of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDth Function Sets or queries the bandwidth limit of an installed module that can perform analog voltage measurements Syntax CHANnel lt x gt VOLTage BWIDt
360. ys the specified source waveform of the specified display group 5 71 DISPlay INTENsity Queries all intensity settings 5 71 DISPlay INTENsity CURSOr GRID Sets or queries the intensity of a display item 5 71 MARKer DISPlay INTerpolate Sets or queries the waveform interpolation method 5 71 DISPlay SDGRoup Select Display Sets or queries the number of the display group that is displayed 5 71 Group DISPlay MAPPing Sets or queries the waveform mapping mode for when the display format is 5 72 Set to an option other than 1 DISPlay SVALue Scale VALUE Sets or queries whether scale values are displayed 5 72 DISPlay TLABel Trace LABEL Sets or queries whether waveform labels are displayed 5 72 DISPlay LINDicator Level Sets or queries whether the right indicator on the TY waveform display is 5 72 Indicator displayed DISPlay MODE EKEY Esc Key Switches the screen display mode 5 72 EVENt Group gt EVENC Queries all event waveform settings 5 73 EVENt DCAPture MODE Sets or queries whether the event waveform s dual capture events are 5 73 displayed EVENt MEVent MODE Manual Sets or queries whether the event waveform s manual events are displayed 5 73 Event EVENt MEVent EXECute Manually inserts an event 5 73 EVENt MEVent SLOPe Sets or queries the manual event external event terminal polarity 5 73
361. zoom factor of an installed 16 CH Voltage Input Module Syntax CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM lt NRf gt CHANnel lt x1 gt VOLTage SCHannel lt x2 gt ZOOM xl to 16 only odd numbered channels are valid lt x2 gt to 16 lt NR gt 0 1 0 111 0 125 0 143 0 167 0 2 0 25 0 33 0 4 0 5 0 556 0 625 0 667 0 714 0 8 0 1 833 1 1 11 1 25 1 33 1 43 67 2 2 22 2 5 3 33 4 5 6 61 8 10 12 5 16 7 20 25 40 50 100 Description Error 113 Undefined header will occur if a module other than a 16 CH Voltage Input Module is installed in the slot that corresponds to the specified channel 5 54 IM DL850 17EN 5 7 CLEar Group The command in this group deals with executing the clear trace operation You can execute the same operation that you can execute by using the CLEAR TRACE key on the front panel CLEar Function Clears traces Syntax CLEar IM DL850 17EN 5 55 pueululo 5 8 COMMunicate Group The commands in this group deal with communications There are no front panel keys that correspond to the commands in this group COMMunicate Function Queries all communication settings Syntax COMMunicate COMMunicate HEADer Function Sets or queries whether headers are attached to query responses Syntax COMMunicate HEADer Boolean COMMunicate HEADer COMMUNICATE HEADER ON COMMUNICATE HEADER gt COM

DL850/DL850V ScopeCorder Communication Interface User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents